Commit f5e4dedfa exposed libpq's internal function PQsocketPoll
without a lot of thought about whether that was an API we really
wanted to chisel in stone. The main problem with it is the use of
time_t to specify the timeout. While we do want an absolute time
so that a loop around PQsocketPoll doesn't have problems with
timeout slippage, time_t has only 1-second resolution. That's
already problematic for libpq's own internal usage --- for example,
pqConnectDBComplete has long had a kluge to treat "connect_timeout=1"
as 2 seconds so that it doesn't accidentally round to nearly zero.
And it's even less likely to be satisfactory for external callers.
Hence, let's change this while we still can.
The best idea seems to be to use an int64 count of microseconds since
the epoch --- basically the same thing as the backend's TimestampTz,
but let's use the standard Unix epoch (1970-01-01) since that's more
likely for clients to be easy to calculate. Millisecond resolution
would be plenty for foreseeable uses, but maybe the day will come that
we're glad we used microseconds.
Also, since time(2) isn't especially helpful for computing timeouts
defined this way, introduce a new function PQgetCurrentTimeUSec
to get the current time in this form.
Remove the hack in pqConnectDBComplete, so that "connect_timeout=1"
now means what you'd expect.
We can also remove the "#include <time.h>" that f5e4dedfa added to
libpq-fe.h, since there's no longer a need for time_t in that header.
It seems better for v17 not to enlarge libpq-fe.h's include footprint
from what it's historically been, anyway.
I also failed to resist the temptation to do some wordsmithing
on PQsocketPoll's documentation.
Patch by me, per complaint from Dominique Devienne.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/913559.1718055575@sss.pgh.pa.us
It wasn't in the documentation at all (even though we document all the
other debugging-like options). Also, change the --help output to show
that it exits after showing, similar to other options.
If the CALL is within an atomic context (e.g. there's an outer
transaction block), _SPI_execute_plan should acquire a fresh snapshot
to execute any such functions with. We failed to do that and instead
passed them the Portal snapshot, which had been acquired at the start
of the current SQL command. This'd lead to seeing stale values of
rows modified since the start of the command.
This is arguably a bug in 84f5c2908: I failed to see that "are we in
non-atomic mode" needs to be defined the same way as it is further
down in _SPI_execute_plan, i.e. check !_SPI_current->atomic not just
options->allow_nonatomic. Alternatively the blame could be laid on
plpgsql, which is unconditionally passing allow_nonatomic = true
for CALL/DO even when it knows it's in an atomic context. However,
fixing it in spi.c seems like a better idea since that will also fix
the problem for any extensions that may have copied plpgsql's coding
pattern.
While here, update an obsolete comment about _SPI_execute_plan's
snapshot management.
Per report from Victor Yegorov. Back-patch to all supported versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGnEboiRe+fG2QxuBO2390F7P8e2MQ6UyBjZSL_w1Cej+E4=Vw@mail.gmail.com
The documentation for POSIX semaphores is missing a reference to
max_wal_senders. This commit fixes that in the same way that
commit 4ebe51a5fb fixed the same issue in the documentation for
System V semaphores.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240517164452.GA1914161%40nathanxps13
Backpatch-through: 12
This HBA entry was using "local" while specifying an address, which was
incorrect. While in it, this adjusts the format of the entry to be
aligned with the surroundings.
Oversight in 8fea86830e.
Reported-by: Stéphane Schildknecht
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/44662001-54c4-4bfd-be93-35e01ca25fa1@gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 16
The formulas for SEMMNI and SEMMNS do not include the archiver
process, which was converted to an auxiliary process in v14, and
the WAL summarizer process, which was introduced in v17. This
commit corrects these formulas and adds a missing reference to
max_wal_senders nearby. Since this section of the documentation
tends to be incorrect quite often, we should likely give up on
documenting the exact formulas in favor of something less fragile,
but that is left as a future exercise.
Reported-by: Sami Imseih
Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240517164452.GA1914161%40nathanxps13
Backpatch-through: 12
Parameter column_name must be an existing column because ALTER
MATERIALIZED VIEW cannot add new columns. The old description was
likely copied from ALTER TABLE.
Author: Erik Wienhold
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6880ca53-7961-4eeb-86d5-6bd05fc2027e@ewie.name
Backpatch-through: 12
When MERGE/SPLIT created new partitions, it was cloning the extended
statistics of the parent table.
However, extended stats on partitioned tables don't behave like
indexes on partitioned tables (which exist only to create physical
indexes on child tables). Rather, extended stats on a parent 1) cause
extended stats to be collected and computed across the whole partition
hierarchy, and 2) do not cause extended stats to be computed for the
individual partitions.
"CREATE TABLE ... PARTITION OF" command doesn't copy extended
statistics. This commit makes createPartitionTable() behave
consistently.
Reported-by: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZiJW1g2nbQs9ekwK%40pryzbyj2023
Author: Alexander Korotkov, Justin Pryzby
This reverts commit e1e83a7171.
Per further discussion on pgsql-release, we wish to ship beta1 with
that feature, and patch the bug, rather than shipping beta1 with
that feature reverted.
After further review, we want to move in the direction of always
quoting GUC names in error messages, rather than the previous (PG16)
wildly mixed practice or the intermittent (mid-PG17) idea of doing
this depending on how possibly confusing the GUC name is.
This commit applies appropriate quotes to (almost?) all mentions of
GUC names in error messages. It partially supersedes a243569bf6 and
8d9978a717, which had moved things a bit in the opposite direction
but which then were abandoned in a partial state.
Author: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAHut%2BPv-kSN8SkxSdoHano_wPubqcg5789ejhCDZAcLFceBR-w%40mail.gmail.com
Specifically, it terminates a background worker even if the caller
couldn't terminate the background worker with pg_terminate_backend().
Commit 3a9b18b309 neglected to update
this. Back-patch to v13, which introduced DROP DATABASE FORCE.
Reviewed by Amit Kapila. Reported by Kirill Reshke.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240429212756.60.nmisch@google.com
There were three problems with the sslnegotiation options:
1. The sslmode=prefer and sslnegotiation=requiredirect combination was
somewhat dangerous, as you might unintentionally fall back to
plaintext authentication when connecting to a pre-v17 server.
2. There was an asymmetry between 'postgres' and 'direct'
options. 'postgres' meant "try only traditional negotiation", while
'direct' meant "try direct first, and fall back to traditional
negotiation if it fails". That was apparent only if you knew that the
'requiredirect' mode also exists.
3. The "require" word in 'requiredirect' suggests that it's somehow
more strict or more secure, similar to sslmode. However, I don't
consider direct SSL connections to be a security feature.
To address these problems:
- Only allow sslnegotiation='direct' if sslmode='require' or
stronger. And for the record, Jacob and Robert felt that we should do
that (or have sslnegotiation='direct' imply sslmode='require') anyway,
regardless of the first issue.
- Remove the 'direct' mode that falls back to traditional negotiation,
and rename what was called 'requiredirect' to 'direct' instead. In
other words, there is no "try both methods" option anymore, 'postgres'
now means the traditional negotiation and 'direct' means a direct SSL
connection.
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio, Robert Haas, Jacob Champion
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/d3b1608a-a1b6-4eda-9ec5-ddb3e4375808%40iki.fi
The CREATE SUBSCRIPTION documentation mentions "false" is the default
option, so let's use true|false rather than on|off in the text which
talks about this option in the ALTER SUBSCRIPTION page.
The other boolean options mentioned in create_subscription.sgml use true
and false so it makes sense to be consistent with these. The "failover"
option is new to v17.
Author: Peter Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+Ps-RqrggaJU5w85BbeQzw9CLmmLgADVJoJ=xx_4D5CWvw@mail.gmail.com
This feature set did not handle empty ranges correctly, and it's now
too late for PostgreSQL 17 to fix it.
The following commits are reverted:
6db4598fcb Add stratnum GiST support function
46a0cd4cef Add temporal PRIMARY KEY and UNIQUE constraints
86232a49a4 Fix comment on gist_stratnum_btree
030e10ff1a Rename pg_constraint.conwithoutoverlaps to conperiod
a88c800deb Use daterange and YMD in without_overlaps tests instead of tsrange.
5577a71fb0 Use half-open interval notation in without_overlaps tests
34768ee361 Add temporal FOREIGN KEY contraints
482e108cd3 Add test for REPLICA IDENTITY with a temporal key
c3db1f30cb doc: clarify PERIOD and WITHOUT OVERLAPS in CREATE TABLE
144c2ce0cc Fix ON CONFLICT DO NOTHING/UPDATE for temporal indexes
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/d0b64a7a-dfe4-4b84-a906-c7dedfa40a3e@eisentraut.org
postgres --name=value and -c name=value are equivalents. This commit
expands the documentation of libpq's "option" connection parameter and
the server startup sequence for shell interactions to mention both
rather than only -c.
Extracted from a larger patch by the same authors.
Reported-by: Alexey Palazhchenko
Author: David Johnston, Aleksander Alekseev
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Peter Eisentraut, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TMkuLiLfrA+EFCPYfhXoMKRxxssB5c86+ibxfaz6+=Sdg@mail.gmail.com
One is about subqueries becoming joins and the other is about optimizing
LIMIT by improving startup cost.
Reported-by: Andy Fan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87h6f4ncc6.fsf@163.com
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Backpatch-through: master
Presently, when this function is called for an unlogged sequence on
a standby server, it will error out with a message like
ERROR: could not open file "base/5/16388": No such file or directory
Since the pg_sequences system view uses pg_sequence_last_value(),
it can error similarly. To fix, modify the function to return NULL
for unlogged sequences on standby servers. Since this bug is
present on all versions since v15, this approach is preferable to
making the ERROR nicer because we need to repair the pg_sequences
view without modifying its definition on released versions. For
consistency, this commit also modifies the function to return NULL
for other sessions' temporary sequences. The pg_sequences view
already appropriately filters out such sequences, so there's no bug
there, but we might as well offer some defense in case someone
invokes this function directly.
Unlogged sequences were first introduced in v15, but temporary
sequences are much older, so while the fix for unlogged sequences
is only back-patched to v15, the temporary sequence portion is
back-patched to all supported versions.
We could also remove the privilege check in the pg_sequences view
definition in v18 if we modify this function to return NULL for
sequences for which the current user lacks privileges, but that is
left as a future exercise for when v18 development begins.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240501005730.GA594666%40nathanxps13
Backpatch-through: 12
There are some problems with the new way to handle these constraints
that were detected at the last minute, and require fixes that appear too
invasive to be doing this late in the cycle. Revert this (again) for
now, we'll try again with these problems fixed.
The following commits are reverted:
b0e96f3119 Catalog not-null constraints
9b581c5341 Disallow changing NO INHERIT status of a not-null constraint
d0ec2ddbe0 Fix not-null constraint test
ac22a9545c Move privilege check to the right place
b0f7dd915b Check stack depth in new recursive functions
3af7217942 Update information_schema definition for not-null constraints
c3709100be Fix propagating attnotnull in multiple inheritance
d9f686a72e Fix restore of not-null constraints with inheritance
d72d32f52d Don't try to assign smart names to constraints
0cd711271d Better handle indirect constraint drops
13daa33fa5 Disallow NO INHERIT not-null constraints on partitioned tables
d45597f72f Disallow direct change of NO INHERIT of not-null constraints
21ac38f498 Fix inconsistencies in error messages
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202405110940.joxlqcx4dogd@alvherre.pgsql
This commit extends the backend-side infrastructure of injection points
so as it becomes possible to register some input data when attaching a
point. This private data can be registered with the function name and
the library name of the callback when attaching a point, then it is
given as input argument to the callback. This gives the possibility for
modules to pass down custom data at runtime when attaching a point
without managing that internally, in a manner consistent with the
callback entry retrieved from the hash shmem table storing the injection
point data.
InjectionPointAttach() gains two arguments, to be able to define the
private data contents and its size.
A follow-up commit will rely on this infrastructure to close a race
condition with the injection point detach in the module
injection_points.
While on it, this changes InjectionPointDetach() to return a boolean,
returning false if a point cannot be detached. This has been mentioned
by Noah as useful when it comes to implement more complex tests with
concurrent point detach, solid with the automatic detach done for local
points in the test module.
Documentation is adjusted in consequence.
Per discussion with Noah Misch.
Reviewed-by: Noah Misch
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240509031553.47@rfd.leadboat.com
A lot of the examples in this section are quite ancient and no
longer match the system's current behavior. I ran through them
and updated the sample output to match what I get today.
Notably, it seems that the tenk1 table got a few pages smaller back
around v12, so that a lot of the cost estimates for queries on that
table are a little different now. (This also caused some examples
to surprisingly not match others, depending on when they were made.)
One mergejoin-based example no longer produces the same plan at all,
so I had to work around that, including switching to a different
example of using an enable_xxx setting.
I also changed a couple of examples that were relying on nonexistent
tables or indexes. IMO the premise of this section is that the
examples should be more-or-less reproducible against the regression
database, so that these examples were unhelpful as given. It's not
that hard to find a corresponding example with the tables we do have.
Some of the EXPLAIN ANALYZE examples were out of date in that we show
more numbers than we did at the time.
Possibly chapter 68 could use similar review, but I'm out of
energy for today.
User-written triggers can modify or block the effects of SQL update
and delete operations. That includes operations that are executed
to implement foreign keys' referential integrity actions (such as
ON UPDATE SET NULL or ON DELETE CASCADE). Therefore it's possible
for a misdesigned trigger to result in a database state that violates
the foreign key constraint.
While this isn't great, the alternatives seem worse: in particular,
refusing to fire triggers for such updates would break many valuable
use-cases. We could also try to recheck the constraint after the
action, but that'd roughly double the already-high cost of FK
constraint enforcement, for no benefit in normal cases. So we've
always considered that it's on the trigger programmer's head to
avoid breaking RI actions. This was never documented anywhere,
though. Add a para to the Triggers chapter to explain it.
Laurenz Albe, David Johnston, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b81fe38fcc25a81be6e2e5b3fc1ff624130762fa.camel@cybertec.at
Both the pgbench --help output and the reference page have sections
for initialization options, benchmarking options, and common options.
But the --debug option ended up in the wrong place on the reference
page. Fix that by making the documentation match the --help output.
The catalog view pg_stats_ext fails to consider privileges for
expression statistics. The catalog view pg_stats_ext_exprs fails
to consider privileges and row-level security policies. To fix,
restrict the data in these views to table owners or roles that
inherit privileges of the table owner. It may be possible to apply
less restrictive privilege checks in some cases, but that is left
as a future exercise. Furthermore, for pg_stats_ext_exprs, do not
return data for tables with row-level security enabled, as is
already done for pg_stats_ext.
On the back-branches, a fix-CVE-2024-4317.sql script is provided
that will install into the "share" directory. This file can be
used to apply the fix to existing clusters.
Bumps catversion on 'master' branch only.
Reported-by: Lukas Fittl
Reviewed-by: Noah Misch, Tomas Vondra, Tom Lane
Security: CVE-2024-4317
Backpatch-through: 14
Both the initdb --help output and the reference page have a section
for options and a section for less commonly used options. But some
recently added options were sprinkled around inconsistently. Fix that
by making the documentation match the --help output.
We support changing NO INHERIT constraint to INHERIT for constraints in
child relations when adding a constraint to some ancestor relation, and
also during pg_upgrade's schema restore; but other than those special
cases, command ALTER TABLE ADD CONSTRAINT should not be allowed to
change an existing constraint from NO INHERIT to INHERIT, as that would
require to process child relations so that they also acquire an
appropriate constraint, which we may not be in a position to do. (It'd
also be surprising behavior.)
It is conceivable that we want to allow ALTER TABLE SET NOT NULL to make
such a change; but in that case some more code is needed to implement it
correctly, so for now I've made that throw the same error message.
Also, during the prep phase of ALTER TABLE ADD CONSTRAINT, acquire locks
on all descendant tables; otherwise we might operate on child tables on
which no locks are held, particularly in the mode where a primary key
causes not-null constraints to be created on children.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7d923a66-55f0-3395-cd40-81c142b5448b@gmail.com
Commit 61461a300c accidentally misspelled the PGcancelConn struct
using the PQ prefix (which admittedly is a very easy typo to make).
Reported off-list.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com>
The documentation said that you need to pick a suitable LC_COLLATE
setting in addition to setting the DETERMINISTIC flag. This would
have been correct if the libc provider supported nondeterministic
collations, but since it doesn't, you actually need to set the LOCALE
option.
Reviewed-by: Kashif Zeeshan <kashi.zeeshan@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/a71023c2-0ae0-45ad-9688-cf3b93d0d65b%40eisentraut.org
This commit makes new partitions created by ALTER TABLE ... SPLIT PARTITION
and ALTER TABLE ... MERGE PARTITIONS commands inherit the paret table access
method.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/84ada05b-be5c-473e-6d1c-ebe5dd21b190%40gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov
The createPartitionTable() function is responsible for creating new partitions
for ALTER TABLE ... MERGE PARTITIONS, and ALTER TABLE ... SPLIT PARTITION
commands. It emulates the behaviour of CREATE TABLE ... (LIKE ...), where
new table persistence should be specified by the user. In the table
partitioning persistent of the partition and its parent must match. So, this
commit makes createPartitionTable() copy the persistence of the parent
partition.
Also, this commit makes createPartitionTable() recheck the persistence after
the new table creation. This is needed because persistence might be affected
by pg_temp in search_path.
This commit also changes the signature of createPartitionTable() making it
take the parent's Relation itself instead of the name of the parent relation,
and return the Relation of new partition. That doesn't lead to
complications, because both callers have the parent table open and need to
open the new partition.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/dbc8b96c-3cf0-d1ee-860d-0e491da20485%40gmail.com
Author: Dmitry Koval
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov, Robert Haas, Justin Pryzby, Pavel Borisov
If an ACL recorded in pg_init_privs mentions a non-pinned role,
that reference must also be noted in pg_shdepend so that we know
that the role can't go away without removing the ACL reference.
Otherwise, DROP ROLE could succeed and leave dangling entries
behind, which is what's causing the recent upgrade-check failures
on buildfarm member copperhead.
This has been wrong since pg_init_privs was introduced, but it's
escaped notice because typical pg_init_privs entries would only
mention the bootstrap superuser (pinned) or at worst the owner
of the extension (who can't go away before the extension does).
We lack even a representation of such a role reference for
pg_shdepend. My first thought for a solution was entries listing
pg_init_privs in classid, but that doesn't work because then there's
noplace to put the granted-on object's classid. Rather than adding
a new column to pg_shdepend, let's add a new deptype code
SHARED_DEPENDENCY_INITACL. Much of the associated boilerplate
code can be cribbed from code for SHARED_DEPENDENCY_ACL.
A lot of the bulk of this patch just stems from the new need to pass
the object's owner ID to recordExtensionInitPriv, so that we can
consult it while updating pg_shdepend. While many callers have that
at hand already, a few places now need to fetch the owner ID of an
arbitrary privilege-bearing object. For that, we assume that there
is a catcache on the relevant catalog's OID column, which is an
assumption already made in ExecGrant_common so it seems okay here.
We do need an entirely new routine RemoveRoleFromInitPriv to perform
cleanup of pg_init_privs ACLs during DROP OWNED BY. It's analogous
to RemoveRoleFromObjectACL, but we can't share logic because that
function operates by building a command parsetree and invoking
existing GRANT/REVOKE infrastructure. There is of course no SQL
command that would update pg_init_privs entries when we're not in
process of creating their extension, so we need a routine that can
do the updates directly.
catversion bump because this changes the expected contents of
pg_shdepend. For the same reason, there's no hope of back-patching
this, even though it fixes a longstanding bug. Fortunately, the
case where it's a problem seems to be near nonexistent in the field.
If it weren't for the buildfarm breakage, I'd have been content to
leave this for v18.
Patch by me; thanks to Daniel Gustafsson for review and discussion.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1745535.1712358659@sss.pgh.pa.us
The paragraph in the docs and the comment applied to
sslnegotiaton=direct, but not sslnegotiation=requiredirect. In
'requiredirect' mode, negotiated SSL is never used. Move the paragraph
in the docs under the description of 'direct' mode, and rephrase it.
Also the comment's reference to reusing a plaintext connection was
bogus. Authentication failure in plaintext mode only happens after
sending the startup packet, so the connection cannot be reused.
Reported-by: Jacob Champion
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAOYmi+=sj+1uydS0NR4nYzw-LRWp3Q-s5speBug5UCLSPMbvGA@mail.gmail.com
The --tablespace-mapping option was specified with required_argument
rather than no_argument, which is wrong. Since the actual argument
string passed to getopt_long() included "T:", the single-character
form of the option still worked, but the long form did not. Repair.
The call to getopt_long() erroneously included "P", which doesn't
correspond to any supported option. Remove.
The help message used "do not" in one place and "don't" in another.
Standardize on "do not".
The documentation erroneously stated that the tablespace mappings
would be applied relative to the pathnames in the first backup
specified on the command line, rather than the final one. Fix.
Thanks to Tomas Vondra and Daniel Gustafsson for alerting me to
these mistakes.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYFznwwaZhHSF1Ze7JeyBv-1yOoSrucKMw37WpF=7RP8g@mail.gmail.com
If not all backups have the same checksum status, but the final backup
has checksums enabled, then the output directory may include pages
with invalid checksums. Document this limitation and explain how to
work around it.
In a future release, we may want to teach pg_combinebackup to
recompute page checksums when required, but as feature freeze has come
and gone, it seems a bit too late to do that for this release.
Patch by me, reviewed by Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZugzOSmgkx97u3pc0M7U8LycWvugqoyWBv6j15a4hE5g@mail.gmail.com
Allow pg_sync_replication_slots() to error out during promotion of standby.
This makes the behavior of the SQL function consistent with the slot sync
worker. We also ensured that pg_sync_replication_slots() cannot be
executed if sync_replication_slots is enabled and the slotsync worker is
already running to perform the synchronization of slots. Previously, it
would have succeeded in cases when the worker is idle and failed when it
is performing sync which could confuse users.
This patch fixes another issue in the slot sync worker where
SignalHandlerForShutdownRequest() needs to be registered *before* setting
SlotSyncCtx->pid, otherwise, the slotsync worker could miss handling
SIGINT sent by the startup process(ShutDownSlotSync) if it is sent before
worker could register SignalHandlerForShutdownRequest(). To be consistent,
all signal handlers' registration is moved to a prior location before we
set the worker's pid.
Ensure that we clean up synced temp slots at the end of
pg_sync_replication_slots() to avoid such slots being left over after
promotion.
Ensure that ShutDownSlotSync() captures SlotSyncCtx->pid under spinlock to
avoid accessing invalid value as it can be reset by concurrent slot sync
exit due to an error.
Author: Shveta Malik
Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie, Bertrand Drouvot, Amit Kapila, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJpy0uBefXUS_TSz=oxmYKHdg-fhxUT0qfjASW3nmqnzVC3p6A@mail.gmail.com
The paragraph describing the JavaScript string literals allowed in
jsonpath expressions unnecessarily mentions JSON by erroneously
listing \v as allowed by JSON and mentioning the \xNN and \u{N...}
backslash escapes as deviations from JSON when in fact both are
accepted by ECMAScript/JavaScript. Fix this by only referring to
JavaScript.
Author: Erik Wienhold <ewie@ewie.name>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1EB17DF9-2636-484B-9DD0-3CAB19C4F5C4@justatheory.com
The paragraph on SSL compression is largely describing events which
took place many years ago, so reword with past tense.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/eac70d46-e61c-4d71-a1e1-78e2bfa19485@eisentraut.org
Do not allow ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... SET (failover = on|off) in a
transaction block as the changed failover option of the slot can't be
rolled back. For the same reason, we refrain from altering the replication
slot's failover property if the subscription is created with a valid
slot_name and create_slot=false.
Reprted-by: Kuroda Hayato
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Shveta Malik, Bertrand Drouvot, Kuroda Hayato
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB57165542B09DFA4943830BF294082@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
The documents were clear that queryid should not be assumed to be stable
between major versions but said nothing about minor versions and left
the reader to guess if that was implied by the mention of the
instability of queryid between major versions.
Here we give minor versions an explicit mention to indicate queryid can
generally be assumed stable between minor versions.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpYGE6h0cD9UO-eHySPynPj1L3J%3DHxT%2BA7Ud8_Yo6AuzA%40mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 12
The optimization for inserts into BRIN indexes added by c1ec02be1d
relies on a cache that needs to be explicitly released after calling
index_insert(). The commit however failed to invoke the cleanup in
validate_index(), which calls index_insert() indirectly through
table_index_validate_scan().
After inspecting index_insert() callers, it seems unique_key_recheck()
is missing the call too.
Fixed by adding the two missing index_insert_cleanup() calls.
The commit does two additional improvements. The aminsertcleanup()
signature is modified to have the index as the first argument, to make
it more like the other AM callbacks. And the aminsertcleanup() callback
is invoked even if the ii_AmCache is NULL, so that it can decide if the
cleanup is necessary.
Author: Alvaro Herrera, Tomas Vondra
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202401091043.e3nrqiad6gb7@alvherre.pgsql
These operators were removed by 2f70fdb064 in the v14 cycle but they were
accidentally left in the table of build-in operator classes. Backpatch down
to v14 where the operators where removed.
Author: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reported-by: Colin Caine <cmcaine@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADwQTQbbr2UQ_fpbyc+8ay=RwEYgYk=TZxH3+RHDqAQfoG+EWA@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: v14
This updates the link from pg_createsubscriber to initial data sync
to actually link to the subsection in question as opposed to the
main logical replication section.
Author: Pavel Luzanov <p.luzanov@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a4af555a-ac60-4416-877d-0440d29b8763@postgrespro.ru
This fixes various typos, duplicated words, and tiny bits of whitespace
mainly in code comments but also in docs.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Author: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Author: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com>
Author: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3F577953-A29E-4722-98AD-2DA9EFF2CBB8@yesql.se
We don't want users to think that pg_combinebackup is trying to check
the validity of individual backups, because it isn't. Adjust the wording
about sanity checks to make it clear that verification of individual
backups is the job of pg_verifybackup, and that the checks performed
by pg_combinebackup are around the relationships between the backups.
Per discussion with David Steele.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/e6f930c3-590c-47b9-b094-217bb2a3e22e@pgmasters.net
This addresses some post-commit review comments for commits 6185c973,
de3600452, and 9425c596a0, with the following changes:
* Fix JSON_TABLE() syntax documentation to use the term
"path_expression" for JSON path expressions instead of
"json_path_specification" to be consistent with the other SQL/JSON
functions.
* Fix a typo in the example code in JSON_TABLE() documentation.
* Rewrite some newly added comments in jsonpath.h.
* In JsonPathQuery(), add missing cast to int before printing an enum
value.
Reported-by: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxG_e0QLCgaELrr2ZNz7AxPeGCNKAORe3fHtFCQLsH4J4Q@mail.gmail.com
The code associated with EXEC SQL DEFINE was unreadable and full of
bugs, notably:
* It'd attempt to free a non-malloced string if the ecpg program
tries to redefine a macro that was defined on the command line.
* Possible memory stomp if user writes "-D=foo".
* Undef'ing or redefining a macro defined on the command line would
change the state visible to the next file, when multiple files are
specified on the command line. (While possibly that could have been
an intentional choice, the code clearly intends to revert to the
original macro state; it's just failing to consider this interaction.)
* Missing "break" in defining a new macro meant that redefinition
of an existing name would cause an extra entry to be added to the
definition list. While not immediately harmful, a subsequent undef
would result in the prior entry becoming visible again.
* The interactions with input buffering are subtle and were entirely
undocumented.
It's not that surprising that we hadn't noticed these bugs,
because there was no test coverage at all of either the -D
command line switch or multiple input files. This patch adds
such coverage (in a rather hacky way I guess).
In addition to the code bugs, the user documentation was confused
about whether the -D switch defines a C macro or an ecpg one, and
it failed to mention that you can write "-Dsymbol=value".
These problems are old, so back-patch to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/998011.1713217712@sss.pgh.pa.us
Previously, we had consecutive, very short chapters called "Generic
WAL" and "Custom WAL Resource Managers," explaining different approaches
to the same problem. Merge them into a single chapter. Explain most
of the differences between the approaches in the chapter's
introductory text, rather than in the individual sections.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/46ac50c1-6b2a-404f-a683-b67af6ab56e9@eisentraut.org
The documentation for SET ROLE states that superusers who switch to
a non-superuser role lose their superuser privileges. While this
is true for most commands, there are exceptions such as SET ROLE
and SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION, which continue to use the current
session user and the authenticated user, respectively.
Furthermore, the description of this command already describes its
effect, so it is arguably unnecessary to include this special case.
This commit removes the note about the superuser case and adds a
sentence about the aforementioned exceptions to the description.
Co-authored-by: Yurii Rashkovskii
Reviewed-by: Shubham Khanna, Robert Haas, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BRLCQysHtME0znk2KUMJN343ksboSRQSU-hCnOjesX6VK300Q%40mail.gmail.com
This addresses a few problems with commit e5da0fe3c2 ("Catalog domain
not-null constraints").
In CREATE DOMAIN, a NOT NULL constraint looks like
CREATE DOMAIN d1 AS int [ CONSTRAINT conname ] NOT NULL
(Before e5da0fe3c2, the constraint name was accepted but ignored.)
But in ALTER DOMAIN, a NOT NULL constraint looks like
ALTER DOMAIN d1 ADD [ CONSTRAINT conname ] NOT NULL VALUE
where VALUE is where for a table constraint the column name would be.
(This works as of e5da0fe3c2. Before e5da0fe3c2, this syntax
resulted in an internal error.)
But for domains, this latter syntax is confusing and needlessly
inconsistent between CREATE and ALTER. So this changes it to just
ALTER DOMAIN d1 ADD [ CONSTRAINT conname ] NOT NULL
(None of these syntaxes are per SQL standard; we are just living with
the bits of inconsistency that have built up over time.)
In passing, this also changes the psql \dD output to not show not-null
constraints in the column "Check", since it's already shown in the
column "Nullable". This has also been off since e5da0fe3c2.
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9ec24d7b-633d-463a-84c6-7acff769c9e8%40eisentraut.org
In the libpq encryption negotiation tests, don't run the GSSAPI tests
unless PG_TEST_EXTRA='kerberos' is also set. That makes it possible to
still run most of the tests when GSSAPI support is compiled in, but
there's no MIT Kerberos installation.
The tools.ietf.org site has been decommissioned and replaced by a
number of sites serving various purposes. Links to RFCs and BCPs
are now 301 redirected to their new respective IETF sites. Since
this serves no purpose and only adds network overhead, update our
links to the new locations.
Backpatch to all supported versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3C1CEA99-FCED-447D-9858-5A579B4C6687@yesql.se
Backpatch-through: v12
A NESTED path allows to extract data from nested levels of JSON
objects given by the parent path expression, which are projected as
columns specified using a nested COLUMNS clause, just like the parent
COLUMNS clause. Rows comprised from a NESTED columns are "joined"
to the row comprised from the parent columns. If a particular NESTED
path evaluates to 0 rows, then the nested COLUMNS will emit NULLs,
making it an OUTER join.
NESTED columns themselves may include NESTED paths to allow
extracting data from arbitrary nesting levels, which are likewise
joined against the rows at the parent level.
Multiple NESTED paths at a given level are called "sibling" paths
and their rows are combined by UNIONing them, that is, after being
joined against the parent row as described above.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Author: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order):
Andres Freund, Alexander Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup,
Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu, Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson,
Justin Pryzby, Álvaro Herrera, Jian He
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
When testing buffer pool logic, it is useful to be able to evict
arbitrary blocks. This function can be used in SQL queries over the
pg_buffercache view to set up a wide range of buffer pool states. Of
course, buffer mappings might change concurrently so you might evict a
block other than the one you had in mind, and another session might
bring it back in at any time. That's OK for the intended purpose of
setting up developer testing scenarios, and more complicated interlocking
schemes to give stronger guararantees about that would likely be less
flexible for actual testing work anyway. Superuser-only.
Author: Palak Chaturvedi <chaturvedipalak1911@gmail.com>
Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com> (docs, small tweaks)
Reviewed-by: Nitin Jadhav <nitinjadhavpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Cary Huang <cary.huang@highgo.ca>
Reviewed-by: Cédric Villemain <cedric.villemain+pgsql@abcsql.com>
Reviewed-by: Jim Nasby <jim.nasby@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Maxim Orlov <orlovmg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALfch19pW48ZwWzUoRSpsaV9hqt0UPyaBPC4bOZ4W+c7FF566A@mail.gmail.com
libpq now always tries to send ALPN. With the traditional negotiated
SSL connections, the server accepts the ALPN, and refuses the
connection if it's not what we expect, but connecting without ALPN is
still OK. With the new direct SSL connections, ALPN is mandatory.
NOTE: This uses "TBD-pgsql" as the protocol ID. We must register a
proper one with IANA before the release!
Author: Greg Stark, Heikki Linnakangas
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent, Jacob Champion
By skipping SSLRequest, you can eliminate one round-trip when
establishing a TLS connection. It is also more friendly to generic TLS
proxies that don't understand the PostgreSQL protocol.
This is disabled by default in libpq, because the direct TLS handshake
will fail with old server versions. It can be enabled with the
sslnegotation=direct option. It will still fall back to the negotiated
TLS handshake if the server rejects the direct attempt, either because
it is an older version or the server doesn't support TLS at all, but
the fallback can be disabled with the sslnegotiation=requiredirect
option.
Author: Greg Stark, Heikki Linnakangas
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent, Jacob Champion
Replace (expr op C1) OR (expr op C2) ... with expr op ANY(ARRAY[C1, C2, ...])
on the preliminary stage of optimization when we are still working with the
expression tree.
Here Cn is a n-th constant expression, 'expr' is non-constant expression, 'op'
is an operator which returns boolean result and has a commuter (for the case
of reverse order of constant and non-constant parts of the expression,
like 'Cn op expr').
Sometimes it can lead to not optimal plan. This is why there is a
or_to_any_transform_limit GUC. It specifies a threshold value of length of
arguments in an OR expression that triggers the OR-to-ANY transformation.
Generally, more groupable OR arguments mean that transformation will be more
likely to win than to lose.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/567ED6CA.2040504%40sigaev.ru
Author: Alena Rybakina <lena.ribackina@yandex.ru>
Author: Andrey Lepikhov <a.lepikhov@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Ranier Vilela <ranier.vf@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
What the documentation calls an exclude_element is an index_elem
according to gram.y, and it allows all the same options that
a CREATE INDEX column specification does. The COLLATE patch
neglected to update the CREATE/ALTER TABLE docs about that,
and later the opclass-parameters patch made the same oversight.
Add those options to the syntax synopses, and polish the
associated text a bit.
Back-patch to v13 where opclass parameters came in. We could
update v12 with just the COLLATE omission, but it doesn't quite
seem worth the trouble at this point.
Shihao Zhong, reviewed by Daniel Vérité, Shubham Khanna and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGRkXqShbVyB8E3gapfdtuwiWTiK=Q67Qb9qwxu=+-w0w46EBA@mail.gmail.com
This patch generalizes libpq's existing single-row mode to allow
individual partial-result PGresults to contain up to N rows, rather
than always one row. This reduces malloc overhead compared to plain
single-row mode, and it is very useful for psql's FETCH_COUNT feature,
since otherwise we'd have to add code (and cycles) to either merge
single-row PGresults into a bigger one or teach psql's
results-printing logic to accept arrays of PGresults.
To avoid API breakage, PQsetSingleRowMode() remains the same, and we
add a new function PQsetChunkedRowsMode() to invoke the more general
case. Also, PGresults obtained the old way continue to carry the
PGRES_SINGLE_TUPLE status code, while if PQsetChunkedRowsMode() is
used then their status code is PGRES_TUPLES_CHUNK. The underlying
logic is the same either way, though.
Daniel Vérité, reviewed by Laurenz Albe and myself (and whacked
around a bit by me, so any remaining bugs are my fault)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKZiRmxsVTkO928CM+-ADvsMyePmU3L9DQCa9NwqjvLPcEe5QA@mail.gmail.com
This new DDL command splits a single partition into several parititions.
Just like ALTER TABLE ... MERGE PARTITIONS ... command, new patitions are
created using createPartitionTable() function with parent partition as the
template.
This commit comprises quite naive implementation which works in single process
and holds the ACCESS EXCLUSIVE LOCK on the parent table during all the
operations including the tuple routing. This is why this new DDL command
can't be recommended for large partitioned tables under a high load. However,
this implementation come in handy in certain cases even as is.
Also, it could be used as a foundation for future implementations with lesser
locking and possibly parallel.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c73a1746-0cd0-6bdd-6b23-3ae0b7c0c582%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Dmitry Koval
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent, Laurenz Albe, Zhihong Yu, Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Robert Haas, Stephane Tachoires
This new DDL command merges several partitions into the one partition of the
target table. The target partition is created using new
createPartitionTable() function with parent partition as the template.
This commit comprises quite naive implementation which works in single process
and holds the ACCESS EXCLUSIVE LOCK on the parent table during all the
operations including the tuple routing. This is why this new DDL command
can't be recommended for large partitioned tables under a high load. However,
this implementation come in handy in certain cases even as is.
Also, it could be used as a foundation for future implementations with lesser
locking and possibly parallel.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c73a1746-0cd0-6bdd-6b23-3ae0b7c0c582%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Dmitry Koval
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent, Laurenz Albe, Zhihong Yu, Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Robert Haas, Stephane Tachoires
Commit 9e8da0f7 taught nbtree to handle ScalarArrayOpExpr quals
natively. This works by pushing down the full context (the array keys)
to the nbtree index AM, enabling it to execute multiple primitive index
scans that the planner treats as one continuous index scan/index path.
This earlier enhancement enabled nbtree ScalarArrayOp index-only scans.
It also allowed scans with ScalarArrayOp quals to return ordered results
(with some notable restrictions, described further down).
Take this general approach a lot further: teach nbtree SAOP index scans
to decide how to execute ScalarArrayOp scans (when and where to start
the next primitive index scan) based on physical index characteristics.
This can be far more efficient. All SAOP scans will now reliably avoid
duplicative leaf page accesses (just like any other nbtree index scan).
SAOP scans whose array keys are naturally clustered together now require
far fewer index descents, since we'll reliably avoid starting a new
primitive scan just to get to a later offset from the same leaf page.
The scan's arrays now advance using binary searches for the array
element that best matches the next tuple's attribute value. Required
scan key arrays (i.e. arrays from scan keys that can terminate the scan)
ratchet forward in lockstep with the index scan. Non-required arrays
(i.e. arrays from scan keys that can only exclude non-matching tuples)
"advance" without the process ever rolling over to a higher-order array.
Naturally, only required SAOP scan keys trigger skipping over leaf pages
(non-required arrays cannot safely end or start primitive index scans).
Consequently, even index scans of a composite index with a high-order
inequality scan key (which we'll mark required) and a low-order SAOP
scan key (which we won't mark required) now avoid repeating leaf page
accesses -- that benefit isn't limited to simpler equality-only cases.
In general, all nbtree index scans now output tuples as if they were one
continuous index scan -- even scans that mix a high-order inequality
with lower-order SAOP equalities reliably output tuples in index order.
This allows us to remove a couple of special cases that were applied
when building index paths with SAOP clauses during planning.
Bugfix commit 807a40c5 taught the planner to avoid generating unsafe
path keys: path keys on a multicolumn index path, with a SAOP clause on
any attribute beyond the first/most significant attribute. These cases
are now all safe, so we go back to generating path keys without regard
for the presence of SAOP clauses (just like with any other clause type).
Affected queries can now exploit scan output order in all the usual ways
(e.g., certain "ORDER BY ... LIMIT n" queries can now terminate early).
Also undo changes from follow-up bugfix commit a4523c5a, which taught
the planner to produce alternative index paths, with path keys, but
without low-order SAOP index quals (filter quals were used instead).
We'll no longer generate these alternative paths, since they can no
longer offer any meaningful advantages over standard index qual paths.
Affected queries thereby avoid all of the disadvantages that come from
using filter quals within index scan nodes. They can avoid extra heap
page accesses from using filter quals to exclude non-matching tuples
(index quals will never have that problem). They can also skip over
irrelevant sections of the index in more cases (though only when nbtree
determines that starting another primitive scan actually makes sense).
There is a theoretical risk that removing restrictions on SAOP index
paths from the planner will break compatibility with amcanorder-based
index AMs maintained as extensions. Such an index AM could have the
same limitations around ordered SAOP scans as nbtree had up until now.
Adding a pro forma incompatibility item about the issue to the Postgres
17 release notes seems like a good idea.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Author: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-By: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=ksvN_sjcnD1+Bt-WtifRA5ok48aDYnq3pkKhxgMQpcw@mail.gmail.com
The BAS_VACUUM ring size has been 256kB since commit d526575f introduced
the mechanism 17 years ago. Commit 1cbbee03 recently made it
configurable but retained the traditional default. The correct default
size has been debated for years, but 256kB is certainly very small.
VACUUM soon needs to write back data it dirtied only 32 blocks ago,
which usually requires flushing the WAL. New experiments in prefetching
pages for VACUUM exacerbated the problem by crashing into dirty data
even sooner. Let's make the default 2MB. That's 1.6% of the default
toy buffer pool size, and 0.2% of 1GB, which would be a considered a
small shared_buffers setting for a real system these days. Users are
still free to set the GUC to a different value.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240403221257.md4gfki3z75cdyf6%40awork3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGLY4Q4ZY4f1rvnFtv6%2BPkjNf8MejdPkcju3Qii9DYqqcQ%40mail.gmail.com
Adds --clone/--copy-file-range options to pg_combinebackup, to allow
copying files using file cloning or copy_file_range(). These methods may
be faster than the standard block-by-block copy, but the main advantage
is that they enable various features provided by CoW filesystems.
This commit only uses these copy methods for files that did not change
and can be copied as a whole from a single backup.
These new copy methods may not be available on all platforms, in which
case the command throws an error (immediately, even if no files would be
copied as a whole). This early failure seems better than failing later
when trying to copy the first file, after performing a lot of work on
earlier files.
If the requested copy method is available, but a checksum needs to be
recalculated (e.g. because of a different checksum type), the file is
still copied using the requested method, but it is also read for the
checksum calculation. Depending on the filesystem this may be more
expensive than just performing the simple copy, but it does enable the
CoW benefits.
Initial patch by Jakub Wartak, various reworks and improvements by me.
Author: Tomas Vondra, Jakub Wartak
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro, Jakub Wartak, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3024283a-7491-4240-80d0-421575f6bb23%40enterprisedb.com
The documentation index is getting very long, which makes it hard
to find things. Since these chapters are all very similar in structure
and content, merging them is a natural way of reducing the size of
the toplevel index.
Rather than actually combining all of the SGML into a single file,
keep one file per <sect1>, and add a glue file that includes all
of them.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmob7_uoYuS2=rVwpVXaRwP-UXz+++saYTC-BCZ42QzSNKQ@mail.gmail.com
This commit does two things:
1) Maintains inactive_since for sync slots whenever the slot is released
just like any other regular slot.
2) Ensures the value is set to the current timestamp during the promotion
of standby to help correctly interpret the time after promotion. We don't
want the slots to appear inactive for a long time after promotion if they
haven't been synchronized recently. This would also avoid the invalidation
of such slots immediately after promotion if tomorrow we have a feature
that invalidates slots based on their inactivity time. Whoever acquires
the slot i.e. makes the slot active will reset it to NULL.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Amit Kapila, Shveta Malik, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1KrPGwfZV9LYGidjxHeW+rxJ=E2ThjXvwRGLO=iLNuo=Q@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACW4aUe-_uFQOjdWCEN-xXoLGhmvRFnL8SNw_TZ5nJe+aw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmob_Ta-t2ty8QrKHBGnNLrf4ZYcwhGHGFsuUoFrAEDw4sA@mail.gmail.com
JSON_TABLE() allows JSON data to be converted into a relational view
and thus used, for example, in a FROM clause, like other tabular
data. Data to show in the view is selected from a source JSON object
using a JSON path expression to get a sequence of JSON objects that's
called a "row pattern", which becomes the source to compute the
SQL/JSON values that populate the view's output columns. Column
values themselves are computed using JSON path expressions applied to
each of the JSON objects comprising the "row pattern", for which the
SQL/JSON query functions added in 6185c9737c are used.
To implement JSON_TABLE() as a table function, this augments the
TableFunc and TableFuncScanState nodes that are currently used to
support XMLTABLE() with some JSON_TABLE()-specific fields.
Note that the JSON_TABLE() spec includes NESTED COLUMNS and PLAN
clauses, which are required to provide more flexibility to extract
data out of nested JSON objects, but they are not implemented here
to keep this commit of manageable size.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Author: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order):
Andres Freund, Alexander Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup,
Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu, Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson,
Justin Pryzby, Álvaro Herrera, Jian He
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
EXPLAIN (ANALYZE, SERIALIZE) allows collection of statistics about
the volume of data emitted by a query, as well as the time taken
to convert the data to the on-the-wire format. Previously there
was no way to investigate this without actually sending the data
to the client, in which case network transmission costs might
swamp what you wanted to see. In particular this feature allows
investigating the costs of de-TOASTing compressed or out-of-line
data during formatting.
Stepan Rutz and Matthias van de Meent,
reviewed by Tomas Vondra and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ca0adb0e-fa4e-c37e-1cd7-91170b18cae1@gmx.de
Presently, the archiver process restarts when an archive callback
ERRORs. To avoid this, archive module authors can use sigsetjmp(),
manage a memory context, etc., but that requires a lot of extra
code that will likely look roughly the same between modules. This
commit adds basic archive callback ERROR handling to pgarch.c so
that module authors won't ordinarily need to worry about this.
While this built-in handler attempts to clean up anything that an
archive module could conceivably have left behind, it is possible
that some modules are doing unexpected things that require
additional cleanup. Module authors should be sure to do any extra
required cleanup in a PG_CATCH block within the archiving callback.
The archiving callback is now called in a short-lived memory
context that the archiver process resets between invocations. If a
module requires longer-lived storage, it must maintain its own
memory context.
Thanks to these changes, the basic_archive module can be greatly
simplified.
Suggested-by: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Yong Li
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230217215624.GA3131134%40nathanxps13
pg_wal_replay_wait() is to be used on standby and specifies waiting for
the specific WAL location to be replayed before starting the transaction.
This option is useful when the user makes some data changes on primary and
needs a guarantee to see these changes on standby.
The queue of waiters is stored in the shared memory array sorted by LSN.
During replay of WAL waiters whose LSNs are already replayed are deleted from
the shared memory array and woken up by setting of their latches.
pg_wal_replay_wait() needs to wait without any snapshot held. Otherwise,
the snapshot could prevent the replay of WAL records implying a kind of
self-deadlock. This is why it is only possible to implement
pg_wal_replay_wait() as a procedure working in a non-atomic context,
not a function.
Catversion is bumped.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/eb12f9b03851bb2583adab5df9579b4b%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Kartyshov Ivan, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Peter Eisentraut, Dilip Kumar, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Alexander Lakhin, Bharath Rupireddy, Euler Taveira
This is useful when connecting to a database asynchronously via
PQconnectStart(), since it handles deciding between poll() and
select(), and some of the required boilerplate.
Tristan Partin, reviewed by Gurjeet Singh, Heikki Linnakangas, Jelte
Fennema-Nio, and me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/D08WWCPVHKHN.3QELIKZJ2D9RZ@neon.tech
Break ReadBuffer() up into two steps. StartReadBuffers() and
WaitReadBuffers() give us two main advantages:
1. Multiple consecutive blocks can be read with one system call.
2. Advice (hints of future reads) can optionally be issued to the
kernel ahead of time.
The traditional ReadBuffer() function is now implemented in terms of
those functions, to avoid duplication.
A new GUC io_combine_limit is defined, and the functions for limiting
per-backend pin counts are made into public APIs. Those are provided
for use by callers of StartReadBuffers(), when deciding how many buffers
to read at once. The following commit will add a higher level mechanism
for doing that automatically with a practical interface.
With some more infrastructure in later work, StartReadBuffers() could
be extended to start real asynchronous I/O instead of just issuing
advice and leaving WaitReadBuffers() to do the work synchronously.
Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (some optimization tweaks)
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Nazir Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar <dilipbalaut@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Tested-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJkOiOCa+mag4BF+zHo7qo=o9CFheB8=g6uT5TUm2gkvA@mail.gmail.com
Previously, we used a simple array for storing dead tuple IDs during
lazy vacuum, which had a number of problems:
* The array used a single allocation and so was limited to 1GB.
* The allocation was pessimistically sized according to table size.
* Lookup with binary search was slow because of poor CPU cache and
branch prediction behavior.
This commit replaces that array with the TID store from commit
30e144287a.
Since the backing radix tree makes small allocations as needed, the
1GB limit is now gone. Further, the total memory used is now often
smaller by an order of magnitude or more, depending on the
distribution of blocks and offsets. These two features should make
multiple rounds of heap scanning and index cleanup an extremely rare
event. TID lookup during index cleanup is also several times faster,
even more so when index order is correlated with heap tuple order.
Since there is no longer a predictable relationship between the number
of dead tuples vacuumed and the space taken up by their TIDs, the
number of tuples no longer provides any meaningful insights for users,
nor is the maximum number predictable. For that reason this commit
also changes to byte-based progress reporting, with the relevant
columns of pg_stat_progress_vacuum renamed accordingly to
max_dead_tuple_bytes and dead_tuple_bytes.
For parallel vacuum, both the TID store and supplemental information
specific to vacuum are shared among the parallel vacuum workers. As
with the previous array, we don't take any locks on TidStore during
parallel vacuum since writes are still only done by the leader
process.
Bump catalog version.
Reviewed-by: John Naylor, (in an earlier version) Dilip Kumar
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAfOZvmfR0j8VmZorZjL7RhTiQdVttNuC4W-Shdc2a-AA%40mail.gmail.com
This patch allows pg_restore to wrap its commands into transaction
blocks, somewhat like --single-transaction, except that we commit
and start a new block after every N objects. Using this mode
with a size limit of 1000 or so objects greatly reduces the number
of transactions consumed by the restore, while preventing any
one transaction from taking enough locks to overrun the receiving
server's shared lock table.
(A value of 1000 works well with the default lock table size of
around 6400 locks. Higher --transaction-size values can be used
if one has increased the receiving server's lock table size.)
Excessive consumption of XIDs has been reported as a problem for
pg_upgrade in particular, but it could be bad for any restore; and the
change also reduces the number of fsyncs and amount of WAL generated,
so it should provide speed benefits too.
This patch does not try to make parallel workers batch the SQL
commands they issue. The trouble with doing that is that other
workers may need to see the objects a worker creates right away.
Possibly this can be improved later.
In this patch I have hard-wired pg_upgrade to use a transaction size
of 1000 divided by the number of parallel restore jobs allowed
(without that, we'd still be at risk of overrunning the shared lock
table). Perhaps there would be value in adding another pg_upgrade
option to allow user control of that, but I'm unsure that it's worth
the trouble; I think few users would use it, and any who did would see
not that much benefit compared to the default.
Patch by me, but the original idea to batch SQL commands during
restore is due to Robins Tharakan.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a9f9376f1c3343a6bb319dce294e20ac@EX13D05UWC001.ant.amazon.com
This commit adds a new COPY option LOG_VERBOSITY, which controls the
amount of messages emitted during processing. Valid values are
'default' and 'verbose'.
This is currently used in COPY FROM when ON_ERROR option is set to
ignore. If 'verbose' is specified, a NOTICE message is emitted for
each discarded row, providing additional information such as line
number, column name, and the malformed value. This helps users to
identify problematic rows that failed to load.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Atsushi Torikoshi, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALj2ACUk700cYhx1ATRQyRw-fBM%2BaRo6auRAitKGff7XNmYfqQ%40mail.gmail.com
This SQL-callable function behaves much like our internal utility
function getBaseType(), except it returns NULL rather than failing for
an invalid type OID. (That behavior is modeled on our experience with
other catalog-inquiry functions such as the ACL checking functions.)
The key advantage over doing a join to pg_type is that it will loop
as needed to find the bottom base type of a nest of domains.
Steve Chavez, reviewed by jian he and others
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGRrpzZSX8j=MQcbCSEisFA=ic=K3bknVfnFjAv1diVJxFHJvg@mail.gmail.com
This allows MERGE commands to include WHEN NOT MATCHED BY SOURCE
actions, which operate on rows that exist in the target relation, but
not in the data source. These actions can execute UPDATE, DELETE, or
DO NOTHING sub-commands.
This is in contrast to already-supported WHEN NOT MATCHED actions,
which operate on rows that exist in the data source, but not in the
target relation. To make this distinction clearer, such actions may
now be written as WHEN NOT MATCHED BY TARGET.
Writing WHEN NOT MATCHED without specifying BY SOURCE or BY TARGET is
equivalent to writing WHEN NOT MATCHED BY TARGET.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Alvaro Herrera, Ted Yu and Vik Fearing.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCWqnKGc57Y_JanUBHQXNKcXd7r=0R4NEZUVwP+syRkWbA@mail.gmail.com
This is marked PGC_SIGHUP, so it can only be set in a configuration
file, not anywhere else; and it is also marked GUC_DISALLOW_IN_AUTO_FILE,
so it can't be set using ALTER SYSTEM. When set to false, the
ALTER SYSTEM command is disallowed.
There was considerable concern that this would be misinterpreted as
a security feature, which it is not, because a determined superuser
has various ways of bypassing it. Hence, a lot of work has gone into
wordsmithing the documentation, in the hopes of avoiding any such
confusion.
Jelte Fennemia-Nio and Gabriele Bartolini, with wording suggestions
for the documentation from many others.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA%2BVUV5rEKt2%2BCdC_KUaPoihMu%2Bi5ChT4WVNTr4CD5-xXZUfuQw%40mail.gmail.com
Allow use of BeginInternalSubTransaction() in parallel mode, so long
as the subtransaction doesn't attempt to acquire an XID or increment
the command counter. Given those restrictions, the other parallel
processes don't need to know about the subtransaction at all, so
this should be safe. The benefit is that it allows subtransactions
intended for error recovery, such as pl/pgsql exception blocks,
to be used in PARALLEL SAFE functions.
Another reason for doing this is that the API of
BeginInternalSubTransaction() doesn't allow reporting failure.
pl/python for one, and perhaps other PLs, copes very poorly with an
error longjmp out of BeginInternalSubTransaction(). The headline
feature of this patch removes the only easily-triggerable failure
case within that function. There remain some resource-exhaustion
and similar cases, which we now deal with by promoting them to FATAL
errors, so that callers need not try to clean up. (It is likely
that such errors would leave us with corrupted transaction state
inside xact.c, making recovery difficult if not impossible anyway.)
Although this work started because of a report of a pl/python crash,
we're not going to do anything about that in the back branches.
Back-patching this particular fix is obviously not very wise.
While we could contemplate some narrower band-aid, pl/python is
already an untrusted language, so it seems okay to classify this
as a "so don't do that" case.
Patch by me, per report from Hao Zhang. Thanks to Robert Haas for
review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALY6Dr-2yLVeVPhNMhuBnRgOZo1UjoTETgtKBx1B2gUi8yy+3g@mail.gmail.com
This adds 3 new variants of the random() function:
random(min integer, max integer) returns integer
random(min bigint, max bigint) returns bigint
random(min numeric, max numeric) returns numeric
Each returns a random number x in the range min <= x <= max.
For the numeric function, the number of digits after the decimal point
is equal to the number of digits that "min" or "max" has after the
decimal point, whichever has more.
The main entry points for these functions are in a new C source file.
The existing random(), random_normal(), and setseed() functions are
moved there too, so that they can all share the same PRNG state, which
is kept private to that file.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Jian He, David Zhang, Aleksander Alekseev,
and Tomas Vondra.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCV89Vxuq93xQdmc0t-0Y2zeeNQTdsjbmV7dyFBPykbV4Q@mail.gmail.com
Many other utilities use -d to specify the database to use, but
pgbench uses it to enable debug mode. This is causing some users
to accidentally enable it. This commit changes -d to accept the
database name and introduces --dbname. Debug mode can still be
enabled with --debug. This is a backward-incompatible change, but
it has been judged to be worth the trade-off, i.e., some scripts
that use pgbench will need to be updated.
Author: Greg Sabino Mullane
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Euler Taveira, Alvaro Herrera, David Christensen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKAnmmLjAzwVtb%3DVEaeuCtnmOLpzkJ1uJ_XiQ362YdD9B72HSg%40mail.gmail.com
It's now possible to specify a table access method via
CREATE TABLE ... USING for a partitioned table, as well change it with
ALTER TABLE ... SET ACCESS METHOD. Specifying an AM for a partitioned
table lets the value be used for all future partitions created under it,
closely mirroring the behavior of the TABLESPACE option for partitioned
tables. Existing partitions are not modified.
For a partitioned table with no AM specified, any new partitions are
created with the default_table_access_method.
Also add ALTER TABLE ... SET ACCESS METHOD DEFAULT, which reverts to the
original state of using the default for new partitions.
The relcache of partitioned tables is not changed: rd_tableam is not
set, even if a partitioned table has a relam set.
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Author: Soumyadeep Chakraborty <soumyadeep2007@gmail.com>
Author: Michaël Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: The authors themselves
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAE-ML+9zM4wJCGCBGv01k96qQ3gFv4WFcFy=zqPHKeaEFwwv6A@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210308010707.GA29832%40telsasoft.com
The documentation for PGTYPESnumeric_to_long only mentioned errno
being set to indicate overflow but the code also sets errno when
underflow happens.
Reported-by: Aidar Imamov <a.imamov@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/eebf0ad50ad4321d65d2d64dd6b7f17d@postgrespro.ru
It must be run on the target server and should be able to connect to
the source server (publisher) and the target server (subscriber). All
tables in the specified database(s) are included in the logical
replication setup. A pair of publication and subscription objects are
created for each database.
The main advantage of pg_createsubscriber over the common logical
replication setup is the initial data copy. It also reduces the
catchup phase.
Some prerequisites must be met to successfully run it. It is
basically the logical replication requirements. It starts creating a
publication using FOR ALL TABLES and a replication slot for each
specified database. Write recovery parameters into the target data
directory and start the target server. It specifies the LSN of the
last replication slot (replication start point) up to which the
recovery will proceed. Wait until the target server is promoted.
Create one subscription per specified database (using publication and
replication slot created in a previous step) on the target server.
Set the replication progress to the replication start point for each
subscription. Enable the subscription for each specified database on
the target server. And finally, change the system identifier on the
target server.
Author: Euler Taveira <euler.taveira@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Shlok Kyal <shlok.kyal.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Shubham Khanna <khannashubham1197@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5ac50071-f2ed-4ace-a8fd-b892cffd33eb@www.fastmail.com
This commit adds a new property called last_inactive_time for slots. It is
set to 0 whenever a slot is made active/acquired and set to the current
timestamp whenever the slot is inactive/released or restored from the disk.
Note that we don't set the last_inactive_time for the slots currently being
synced from the primary to the standby because such slots are typically
inactive as decoding is not allowed on those.
The 'last_inactive_time' will be useful on production servers to debug and
analyze inactive replication slots. It will also help to know the lifetime
of a replication slot - one can know how long a streaming standby, logical
subscriber, or replication slot consumer is down.
The 'last_inactive_time' will also be useful to implement inactive
timeout-based replication slot invalidation in a future commit.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Amit Kapila, Shveta Malik
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALj2ACW4aUe-_uFQOjdWCEN-xXoLGhmvRFnL8SNw_TZ5nJe+aw@mail.gmail.com
Straight-forward index-level REINDEX is not supported with multiple jobs as
we cannot control the concurrent processing of multiple indexes depending on
the same relation. Instead, we dedicate the whole table to certain reindex
job. Thus, if indexes in the lists belong to different tables, that gives us
a fair level of parallelism.
This commit teaches get_parallel_object_list() to fetch table names for
indexes in the case of index-level REINDEX. The same tables are grouped
together in the output order, and the list of indexes is also rebuilt to
match that order. Later during processingof that list, we push indexes
belonging to the same table into the same job.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACG%3DezZU_VwDi-1PN8RUSE6mcYG%2BYx1NH_rJO4%2BKe-mKqLp%3DNw%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Maxim Orlov, Svetlana Derevyanko, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Since commit 3d14e171e9, SET ROLE has required the current session
user to have membership with the SET option in the target role, but
the SET ROLE documentation only mentions the membership
requirement. This commit adds this important detail to the SET
ROLE page.
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BRLCQysHtME0znk2KUMJN343ksboSRQSU-hCnOjesX6VK300Q%40mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 16
Add PERIOD clause to foreign key constraint definitions. This is
supported for range and multirange types. Temporal foreign keys check
for range containment instead of equality.
This feature matches the behavior of the SQL standard temporal foreign
keys, but it works on PostgreSQL's native ranges instead of SQL's
"periods", which don't exist in PostgreSQL (yet).
Reference actions ON {UPDATE,DELETE} {CASCADE,SET NULL,SET DEFAULT}
are not supported yet.
Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
This adds the X509 attributes notBefore and notAfter to sslinfo
as well as pg_stat_ssl to allow verifying and identifying the
validity period of the current client certificate. OpenSSL has
APIs for extracting notAfter and notBefore, but they are only
supported in recent versions so we have to calculate the dates
by hand in order to make this work for the older versions of
OpenSSL that we still support.
Original patch by Cary Huang with additional hacking by Jacob
and myself.
Author: Cary Huang <cary.huang@highgo.ca>
Co-author: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Co-author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/182b8565486.10af1a86f158715.2387262617218380588@highgo.ca
Till now, the reason for replication slot invalidation is not tracked
directly in pg_replication_slots. A recent commit 007693f2a3 added
'conflict_reason' to show the reasons for slot conflict/invalidation, but
only for logical slots.
This commit adds a new column 'invalidation_reason' to show invalidation
reasons for both physical and logical slots. And, this commit also turns
'conflict_reason' text column to 'conflicting' boolean column (effectively
reverting commit 007693f2a3). The 'conflicting' column is true for
invalidation reasons 'rows_removed' and 'wal_level_insufficient' because
those make the slot conflict with recovery. When 'conflicting' is true,
one can now look at the new 'invalidation_reason' column for the reason
for the logical slot's conflict with recovery.
The new 'invalidation_reason' column will also be useful to track other
invalidation reasons in the future commit.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Amit Kapila, Shveta Malik
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/ZfR7HuzFEswakt/a%40ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALj2ACW4aUe-_uFQOjdWCEN-xXoLGhmvRFnL8SNw_TZ5nJe+aw@mail.gmail.com
The old text claims that HOT completely removes old row versions.
It was unclear whether it just meant the tuples themselves, or the
tuples together with their line pointers. If it meant the former,
it was wrong because we can remove dead row versions even when no
HOT updates have occurred, so it's not describing a benefit of HOT.
If it meant the latter, it was wrong because HOT doesn't allow
reclaiming the root tuple's line pointer.
This section does seems like it's intended to be more of an
informal introduction to HOT than a precise technical description
of every detail of how it works, but we still don't want it to
say things that are just not true, so update the text enough
to avoid that.
Patch by me, reviewed by James Coleman (although he would have
preferred more extensive changes) and Shubham Khanna.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobH6DPmR-u--Xgeg8cYUwhDhypNsv38nDrAJyf_xno=TQ@mail.gmail.com
This introduces the following SQL/JSON functions for querying JSON
data using jsonpath expressions:
JSON_EXISTS(), which can be used to apply a jsonpath expression to a
JSON value to check if it yields any values.
JSON_QUERY(), which can be used to to apply a jsonpath expression to
a JSON value to get a JSON object, an array, or a string. There are
various options to control whether multi-value result uses array
wrappers and whether the singleton scalar strings are quoted or not.
JSON_VALUE(), which can be used to apply a jsonpath expression to a
JSON value to return a single scalar value, producing an error if it
multiple values are matched.
Both JSON_VALUE() and JSON_QUERY() functions have options for
handling EMPTY and ERROR conditions, which can be used to specify
the behavior when no values are matched and when an error occurs
during jsonpath evaluation, respectively.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Author: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order):
Andres Freund, Alexander Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup,
Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu, Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson,
Justin Pryzby, Álvaro Herrera, Jian He, Anton A. Melnikov,
Nikita Malakhov, Peter Eisentraut, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqHROpf9e644D8BRqYvaAPmgBZVup-xKMDPk-nd4EpgzHw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
Commit cca97ce6a6 allowed dbname in pg_basebackup connstring and in this
commit we allow it to be written in postgresql.auto.conf when -R option is
used. The database name in the connection string will be used by the
logical replication slot synchronization on standby.
The dbname will be recorded only if specified explicitly in the connection
string or environment variable.
Masahiko Sawada hasn't reviewed the code in detail but endorsed the idea.
Author: Vignesh C, Kuroda Hayato
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB8KJ=hdKdg+UeXhReeHpHA6N6v3e0qFF+ZsPFHk9_ThWKf=2A@mail.gmail.com
In combination with to_regtype, this allows converting a string to
the "canonicalized" form emitted by format_type. That usage requires
parsing the string twice, which is slightly annoying but not really
too expensive. We considered alternatives such as returning a record
type, but that way was notationally uglier than this, and possibly
less flexible.
Like to_regtype(), we'd rather that this return NULL for any bad
input, but the underlying type-parsing logic isn't yet capable of
not throwing syntax errors. Adjust the documentation for both
functions to point that out.
In passing, fix up a couple of nearby entries in the System Catalog
Information Functions table that had not gotten the word about our
since-v13 convention for displaying function usage examples.
David Wheeler and Erik Wienhold, reviewed by Pavel Stehule, Jim Jones,
and others.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DF2324CA-2673-4ABE-B382-26B5770B6AA3@justatheory.com
The builtin C.UTF-8 locale has similar semantics to the libc locale of
the same name. That is, code point sort order (fast, memcmp-based)
combined with Unicode semantics for character operations such as
pattern matching, regular expressions, and
LOWER()/INITCAP()/UPPER(). The character semantics are based on
Unicode simple case mappings.
The builtin provider's C.UTF-8 offers several important advantages
over libc:
* faster sorting -- benefits from additional optimizations such as
abbreviated keys and varstrfastcmp_c
* faster case conversion, e.g. LOWER(), at least compared with some
libc implementations
* available on all platforms with identical semantics, and the
semantics are stable, testable, and documentable within a given
Postgres major version
Being based on memcmp, the builtin C.UTF-8 locale does not offer
natural language sort order. But it is an improvement for most use
cases that might otherwise use libc's "C.UTF-8" locale, as well as
many use cases that use libc's "C" locale.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ff4c2f2f9c8fc7ca27c1c24ae37ecaeaeaff6b53.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Daniel Vérité, Peter Eisentraut, Jeremy Schneider
Historically we've printed SubPlan expression nodes as "(SubPlan N)",
which is pretty uninformative. Trying to reproduce the original SQL
for the subquery is still as impractical as before, and would be
mighty verbose as well. However, we can still do better than that.
Displaying the "testexpr" when present, and adding a keyword to
indicate the SubLinkType, goes a long way toward showing what's
really going on.
In addition, this patch gets rid of EXPLAIN's use of "$n" to represent
subplan and initplan output Params. Instead we now print "(SubPlan
N).colX" or "(InitPlan N).colX" to represent the X'th output column
of that subplan. This eliminates confusion with the use of "$n" to
represent PARAM_EXTERN Params, and it's useful for the first part of
this change because it eliminates needing some other indication of
which subplan is referenced by a SubPlan that has a testexpr.
In passing, this adds simple regression test coverage of the
ROWCOMPARE_SUBLINK code paths, which were entirely unburdened
by testing before.
Tom Lane and Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Aleksander Alekseev.
Thanks to Chantal Keller for raising the question of whether
this area couldn't be improved.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2838538.1705692747@sss.pgh.pa.us
Based on comments from Peter Eisentraut.
* Document CREATE DATABASE ... BUILTIN_LOCALE.
* Determine required encoding based on locale name for CREATE
COLLATION. Use -1 for "C" (requires catversion bump).
* initdb output fixups.
* Make ctype_is_c a constant true for now.
* Fixups to ICU 010_create_database.pl test.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4135cf11-206d-40ed-96c0-9363c1232379@eisentraut.org
This allows a RETURNING clause to be appended to a MERGE query, to
return values based on each row inserted, updated, or deleted. As with
plain INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE commands, the returned values are
based on the new contents of the target table for INSERT and UPDATE
actions, and on its old contents for DELETE actions. Values from the
source relation may also be returned.
As with INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE, the output of MERGE ... RETURNING may be
used as the source relation for other operations such as WITH queries
and COPY commands.
Additionally, a special function merge_action() is provided, which
returns 'INSERT', 'UPDATE', or 'DELETE', depending on the action
executed for each row. The merge_action() function can be used
anywhere in the RETURNING list, including in arbitrary expressions and
subqueries, but it is an error to use it anywhere outside of a MERGE
query's RETURNING list.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Isaac Morland, Vik Fearing, Alvaro Herrera,
Gurjeet Singh, Jian He, Jeff Davis, Merlin Moncure, Peter Eisentraut,
and Wolfgang Walther.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCWePEGQR5LBn-vD6SfeLZafzEm2Qy_L_Oky2=qw2w3Pzg@mail.gmail.com
This function returns the chunk_id of an on-disk TOASTed value. If
the value is un-TOASTed or not on-disk, it returns NULL. This is
useful for identifying which values are actually TOASTed and for
investigating "unexpected chunk number" errors.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Yugo Nagata
Reviewed-by: Jian He
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230329105507.d764497456eeac1ca491b5bd%40sraoss.co.jp
New provider for collations, like "libc" or "icu", but without any
external dependency.
Initially, the only locale supported by the builtin provider is "C",
which is identical to the libc provider's "C" locale. The libc
provider's "C" locale has always been treated as a special case that
uses an internal implementation, without using libc at all -- so the
new builtin provider uses the same implementation.
The builtin provider's locale is independent of the server environment
variables LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE. Using the builtin provider, the
database collation locale can be "C" while LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE are
set to "en_US", which is impossible with the libc provider.
By offering a new builtin provider, it clarifies that the semantics of
a collation using this provider will never depend on libc, and makes
it easier to document the behavior.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ab925f69-5f9d-f85e-b87c-bd2a44798659@joeconway.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/dd9261f4-7a98-4565-93ec-336c1c110d90@manitou-mail.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ff4c2f2f9c8fc7ca27c1c24ae37ecaeaeaff6b53.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Daniel Vérité, Peter Eisentraut, Jeremy Schneider
pg_stat_checkpointer contains statistics for checkpoints and restartpoints.
Before 12915a58ee documentation said only about checkpoints implying that
restartpoint is the variation of checkpoint. 12915a58ee introduced
new separate statistics fields for restartpoints. This commit explicitly
documents fields that are relevant for both checkpoints and restartpoints.
Reported-by: Magnus Hagander
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevExav5-SR0x%2BG9kBUMV0G8XsvSUfuyyqmYBBJi6VHns6sw%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Anton A. Melnikov
Roles with MAINTAIN on a relation may run VACUUM, ANALYZE, REINDEX,
REFRESH MATERIALIZE VIEW, CLUSTER, and LOCK TABLE on the relation.
Roles with privileges of pg_maintain may run those same commands on
all relations.
This was previously committed for v16, but it was reverted in
commit 151c22deee due to concerns about search_path tricks that
could be used to escalate privileges to the table owner. Commits
2af07e2f74, 59825d1639, and c7ea3f4229 resolved these concerns by
restricting search_path when running maintenance commands.
Bumps catversion.
Reviewed-by: Jeff Davis
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240305161235.GA3478007%40nathanxps13
Before this patch, if you took a full backup on server A and then
tried to use the backup manifest to take an incremental backup on
server B, it wouldn't know that the manifest was from a different
server and so the incremental backup operation could potentially
complete without error. When you later tried to run pg_combinebackup,
you'd find out that your incremental backup was and always had been
invalid. That's poor timing, because nobody likes finding out about
backup problems only at restore time.
With this patch, you'll get an error when trying to take the (invalid)
incremental backup, which seems a lot nicer.
Amul Sul, revised by me. Review by Michael Paquier.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYLZzbSAMM3cAjV4Y+iCRZn-bR9H2+Mdz7NdaJFU1Zb5w@mail.gmail.com
In the synopsis, make the syntax for merge_update consistent with the
syntax for a plain UPDATE command. It was missing the optional "ROW"
keyword that can be used in a multi-column assignment, and the option
to assign from a multi-column subquery, both of which have been
supported by MERGE since it was introduced.
In the parameters section for the with_query parameter, mention that
WITH RECURSIVE isn't supported, since this is different from plain
INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE commands. While at it, move that entry to
the top of the list, for consistency with the other pages.
Back-patch to v15, where MERGE was introduced.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCWoQyWkMFfu7JXXQr8dA6%3DgxjhYzgpuBP2oz0QoJTxGWw%40mail.gmail.com
The existing PQcancel API uses blocking IO, which makes PQcancel
impossible to use in an event loop based codebase without blocking the
event loop until the call returns. It also doesn't encrypt the
connection over which the cancel request is sent, even when the original
connection required encryption.
This commit adds a PQcancelConn struct and assorted functions, which
provide a better mechanism of sending cancel requests; in particular all
the encryption used in the original connection are also used in the
cancel connection. The main entry points are:
- PQcancelCreate creates the PQcancelConn based on the original
connection (but does not establish an actual connection).
- PQcancelStart can be used to initiate non-blocking cancel requests,
using encryption if the original connection did so, which must be
pumped using
- PQcancelPoll.
- PQcancelReset puts a PQcancelConn back in state so that it can be
reused to send a new cancel request to the same connection.
- PQcancelBlocking is a simpler-to-use blocking API that still uses
encryption.
Additional functions are
- PQcancelStatus, mimicks PQstatus;
- PQcancelSocket, mimicks PQcancelSocket;
- PQcancelErrorMessage, mimicks PQerrorMessage;
- PQcancelFinish, mimicks PQfinish.
Author: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Denis Laxalde <denis.laxalde@dalibo.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/AM5PR83MB0178D3B31CA1B6EC4A8ECC42F7529@AM5PR83MB0178.EURPRD83.prod.outlook.com
Presently, reindexdb's --table, --schema, --index, and --system
options cannot be used together with --all, i.e., you cannot
specify objects to process in all databases. This commit removes
this unnecessary restriction. Furthermore, it removes the
restriction that --system cannot be used with --table, --schema,
and --index. There is no such restriction for the latter options,
and there is no technical reason to disallow these combinations.
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Dean Rasheed
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230628232402.GA1954626%40nathanxps13
Presently, clusterdb's --table option cannot be used together with
--all, i.e., you cannot specify tables to process in all databases.
This commit removes this unnecessary restriction. In passing,
change the synopsis in the documentation to use "[option...]"
instead of "[--verbose | -v]". There are other general-purpose
options (e.g., --quiet and --echo), but the synopsis currently only
lists --verbose.
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Dean Rasheed
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230628232402.GA1954626%40nathanxps13
The list of connection statuses that PQstatus might return during an
asynchronous connection attempt was outdated:
1. CONNECTION_SETENV is never returned anymore and is only part of the
enum for backwards compatibility, so remove it from the docs.
2. CONNECTION_CHECK_STANDBY and CONNECTION_GSS_STARTUP were not listed,
so add them.
CONNECTION_NEEDED and CONNECTION_CHECK_TARGET are not listed in the docs
on purpose, since these are internal states that can never be observed
by a caller of PQstatus.
Author: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQRb21spiiykQ48rzz8w+Hcykz+mB2_hxR65D9Qk6nnw=w@mail.gmail.com
Presently, vacuumdb's --table, --schema, and --exclude-schema
options cannot be used together with --all, i.e., you cannot
specify tables or schemas to process in all databases. This commit
removes this unnecessary restriction, thus enabling potentially
useful commands like "vacuumdb --all --schema pg_catalog".
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Dean Rasheed
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230628232402.GA1954626%40nathanxps13
We expect the 'two_phase' and 'failover' properties to match between the
slot on the publisher and a subscription option on the subscriber.
Otherwise, the slot on the publisher may behave differently from what the
subscription's failover option says.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Tristen Raab, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZbkYrLPhH+RxpZlW@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
Rename pg_collation.colliculocale to colllocale, and
pg_database.daticulocale to datlocale. These names reflects that the
fields will be useful for the upcoming builtin provider as well, not
just for ICU.
This is purely a rename; no changes to the meaning of the fields.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ff4c2f2f9c8fc7ca27c1c24ae37ecaeaeaff6b53.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
This patch provides a way to ensure that physical standbys that are
potential failover candidates have received and flushed changes before
the primary server making them visible to subscribers. Doing so guarantees
that the promoted standby server is not lagging behind the subscribers
when a failover is necessary.
The logical walsender now guarantees that all local changes are sent and
flushed to the standby servers corresponding to the replication slots
specified in 'standby_slot_names' before sending those changes to the
subscriber.
Additionally, the SQL functions pg_logical_slot_get_changes,
pg_logical_slot_peek_changes and pg_replication_slot_advance are modified
to ensure that they process changes for failover slots only after physical
slots specified in 'standby_slot_names' have confirmed WAL receipt for those.
Author: Hou Zhijie and Shveta Malik
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Peter Smith, Bertrand Drouvot, Ajin Cherian, Nisha Moond, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
This option can be used to switch a relation to use the access method
set by default_table_access_method when running the command.
This has come up when discussing the possibility to support setting
pg_class.relam for partitioned tables (left out here as future work),
while being useful on its own for relations with physical storage as
these must have an access method set.
Per suggestion from Justin Pryzby.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZeCZ89xAVFeOmrQC@pryzbyj2023
The copy_file_range() system call is available on at least Linux and
FreeBSD, and asks the kernel to use efficient ways to copy ranges of a
file. Options available to the kernel include sharing block ranges
(similar to --clone mode), and pushing down block copies to the storage
layer.
For automated testing, see PG_TEST_PG_UPGRADE_MODE. (Perhaps in a later
commit we could consider setting this mode for one of the CI targets.)
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKe7Hb0-UNih8VD5UNZy5-ojxFb3Pr3xSBBL8qj2M2%3DdQ%40mail.gmail.com
pg_constraint.conwithoutoverlaps was recently added to support primary
keys and unique constraints with the WITHOUT OVERLAPS clause. An
upcoming patch provides the foreign-key side of this functionality,
but the syntax there is different and uses the keyword PERIOD. It
would make sense to use the same pg_constraint field for both of
these, but then we should pick a more general name that conveys "this
constraint has a temporal/period-related feature". conperiod works
for that and is nicely compact. Changing this now avoids possibly
having to introduce versioning into clients. Note there are still
some "without overlaps" variables left, which deal specifically with
the parsing of the primary key/unique constraint feature.
Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
Presently, if an archive module's check_configured_cb callback
returns false, a generic WARNING message is emitted, which
unfortunately provides no actionable details about the reason why
the module is not configured. This commit introduces a macro that
archive module authors can use to add a DETAIL line to this WARNING
message.
Co-authored-by: Tung Nguyen
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4109578306242a7cd5661171647e11b2%40oss.nttdata.com
The adminpack extension was only used to support pgAdmin III, which
in turn was declared EOL many years ago. Removing the extension also
allows us to remove functions from core as well which were only used
to support old version of adminpack.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACUmL5TraYBUBqDZBi1C+Re8_=SekqGYqYprj_W8wygQ8w@mail.gmail.com
Commit 5f2e179bd3 missed one place in rules.sgml that should have
mentioned MERGE. Also, be more specific when saying that MERGE doesn't
support rules, since it does support SELECT rules.
The datatype for analyze_sampling had accidentally been set to text
and not string. Backpatch to v16 where analyze_sampling first was
introduced.
Author: Shinya Kato <Shinya11.Kato@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7fd9166b9fda267411793f39986d7f24@oss.nttdata.com
Backpatch-through: v16
Now that BackendId was just another index into the proc array, it was
redundant with the 0-based proc numbers used in other places. Replace
all usage of backend IDs with proc numbers.
The only place where the term "backend id" remains is in a few pgstat
functions that expose backend IDs at the SQL level. Those IDs are now
in fact 0-based ProcNumbers too, but the documentation still calls
them "backend ids". That term still seems appropriate to describe what
the numbers are, so I let it be.
One user-visible effect is that pg_temp_0 is now a valid temp schema
name, for backend with ProcNumber 0.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/8171f1aa-496f-46a6-afc3-c46fe7a9b407@iki.fi
Correct out-of-date text that said the "default" collation is always
based on LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE.
Also reformat into a list to make it easier to understand and compare
the available collations, and briefly document the stability
characteristics of each one.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4a69d067374d2f6bfb66f5bfb2ab9a020493d49f.camel@j-davis.com
This allows the target relation of MERGE to be an auto-updatable or
trigger-updatable view, and includes support for WITH CHECK OPTION,
security barrier views, and security invoker views.
A trigger-updatable view must have INSTEAD OF triggers for every type
of action (INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE) mentioned in the MERGE command.
An auto-updatable view must not have any INSTEAD OF triggers. Mixing
auto-update and trigger-update actions (i.e., having a partial set of
INSTEAD OF triggers) is not supported.
Rule-updatable views are also not supported, since there is no
rewriter support for non-SELECT rules with MERGE operations.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Jian He and Alvaro Herrera.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCVcB1g0nmxuEc-A+gGB0HnfcGQNGYH7gS=7rq0u0zOBXA@mail.gmail.com
More precisely, what we do here is make the SLRU cache sizes
configurable with new GUCs, so that sites with high concurrency and big
ranges of transactions in flight (resp. multixacts/subtransactions) can
benefit from bigger caches. In order for this to work with good
performance, two additional changes are made:
1. the cache is divided in "banks" (to borrow terminology from CPU
caches), and algorithms such as eviction buffer search only affect
one specific bank. This forestalls the problem that linear searching
for a specific buffer across the whole cache takes too long: we only
have to search the specific bank, whose size is small. This work is
authored by Andrey Borodin.
2. Change the locking regime for the SLRU banks, so that each bank uses
a separate LWLock. This allows for increased scalability. This work
is authored by Dilip Kumar. (A part of this was previously committed as
d172b717c6f4.)
Special care is taken so that the algorithms that can potentially
traverse more than one bank release one bank's lock before acquiring the
next. This should happen rarely, but particularly clog.c's group commit
feature needed code adjustment to cope with this. I (Álvaro) also added
lots of comments to make sure the design is sound.
The new GUCs match the names introduced by bcdfa5f2e2 in the
pg_stat_slru view.
The default values for these parameters are similar to the previous
sizes of each SLRU. commit_ts, clog and subtrans accept value 0, which
means to adjust by dividing shared_buffers by 512 (so 2MB for every 1GB
of shared_buffers), with a cap of 8MB. (A new slru.c function
SimpleLruAutotuneBuffers() was added to support this.) The cap was
previously 1MB for clog, so for sites with more than 512MB of shared
memory the total memory used increases, which is likely a good tradeoff.
However, other SLRUs (notably multixact ones) retain smaller sizes and
don't support a configured value of 0. These values based on
shared_buffers may need to be revisited, but that's an easy change.
There was some resistance to adding these new GUCs: it would be better
to adjust to memory pressure automatically somehow, for example by
stealing memory from shared_buffers (where the caches can grow and
shrink naturally). However, doing that seems to be a much larger
project and one which has made virtually no progress in several years,
and because this is such a pain point for so many users, here we take
the pragmatic approach.
Author: Andrey Borodin <x4mmm@yandex-team.ru>
Author: Dilip Kumar <dilipbalaut@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amul Sul, Gilles Darold, Anastasia Lubennikova,
Ivan Lazarev, Robert Haas, Thomas Munro, Tomas Vondra,
Yura Sokolov, Васильев Дмитрий (Dmitry Vasiliev).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2BEC2B3F-9B61-4C1D-9FB5-5FAB0F05EF86@yandex-team.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-vzDvNz=ExGXz6gdyjtzGixKSqs0mKHMmaQ8sOSEFZ33A@mail.gmail.com
There isn't a lot of user demand for AIX support, we have a bunch of
hacks to work around AIX-specific compiler bugs and idiosyncrasies,
and no one has stepped up to the plate to properly maintain it.
Remove support for AIX to get rid of that maintenance overhead. It's
still supported for stable versions.
The acute issue that triggered this decision was that after commit
8af2565248, the AIX buildfarm members have been hitting this
assertion:
TRAP: failed Assert("(uintptr_t) buffer == TYPEALIGN(PG_IO_ALIGN_SIZE, buffer)"), File: "md.c", Line: 472, PID: 2949728
Apperently the "pg_attribute_aligned(a)" attribute doesn't work on AIX
for values larger than PG_IO_ALIGN_SIZE, for a static const variable.
That could be worked around, but we decided to just drop the AIX support
instead.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20240224172345.32@rfd.leadboat.com
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Noah Misch, Thomas Munro
The new names are intended to match those in an upcoming patch that adds
a few GUCs to configure the SLRU buffer sizes.
Backwards compatibility concern: this changes the accepted names for
function pg_stat_slru_rest(). Since this function recognizes "any other
string" as a request to reset the entry for "other", this means that
calling it with the old names would silently reset "other" instead of
doing nothing or throwing an error.
Reviewed-by: Andrey M. Borodin <x4mmm@yandex-team.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202402261616.dlriae7b6emv@alvherre.pgsql
Add a note about the additional privileges required after the fix in
4989ce7264 (wording per Tom Lane); also change marked-up mentions of
"target_table_name" to be simply "the target table" or the like. Also,
note that "join_condition" is scouted for requisite privileges.
Backpatch to 15.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202402211653.zuh6objy3z72@alvherre.pgsql
By enabling slot synchronization, all the failover logical replication
slots on the primary (assuming configurations are appropriate) are
automatically created on the physical standbys and are synced
periodically. The slot sync worker on the standby server pings the primary
server at regular intervals to get the necessary failover logical slots
information and create/update the slots locally. The slots that no longer
require synchronization are automatically dropped by the worker.
The nap time of the worker is tuned according to the activity on the
primary. The slot sync worker waits for some time before the next
synchronization, with the duration varying based on whether any slots were
updated during the last cycle.
A new parameter sync_replication_slots enables or disables this new
process.
On promotion, the slot sync worker is shut down by the startup process to
drop any temporary slots acquired by the slot sync worker and to prevent
the worker from trying to fetch the failover slots.
A functionality to allow logical walsenders to wait for the physical will
be done in a subsequent commit.
Author: Shveta Malik, Hou Zhijie based on design inputs by Masahiko Sawada and Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Bertrand Drouvot, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Ajin Cherian, Nisha Moond, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
The explanation of interval's behavior in datatype.sgml wasn't wrong
exactly, but it was unclear, partly because it buried the lede about
there being three internal fields. Rearrange and wordsmith for more
clarity.
The discussion of extract() claimed that input of type date was
handled by casting, but actually there's been a separate SQL function
taking date for a very long time. Also, it was mostly silent about
how interval inputs are handled, but there are several field types
for which it seems useful to be specific.
Improve discussion of justify_days()/justify_hours() too.
In passing, remove vertical space in some groups of examples,
as there was little consistency about whether to have such space
or not. (I only did this within the datetime functions section;
there are some related inconsistencies elsewhere.)
Per discussion of bug #18348 from Michael Bondarenko. There
may be some code changes coming out of that discussion too,
but we likely won't back-patch them. This docs-only patch
seems useful to back-patch, though I only carried it back to
v13 because it didn't apply easily in v12.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18348-b097a3587dfde8a4@postgresql.org
A child table can specify a compression or storage method different
from its parents. This was previously an error. (But this was
inconsistently enforced because for example the settings could be
changed later using ALTER TABLE.) This now also allows an explicit
override if multiple parents have different compression or storage
settings, which was previously an error that could not be overridden.
The compression and storage properties remains unchanged in a child
inheriting from parent(s) after its creation, i.e., when using ALTER
TABLE ... INHERIT. (This is not changed.)
Before this change, the error detail would mention the first pair of
conflicting parent compression or storage methods. But with this
change it waits till the child specification is considered by which
time we may have encountered many such conflicting pairs. Hence the
error detail after this change does not include the conflicting
compression/storage methods. Those can be obtained from parent
definitions if necessary. The code to maintain list of all
conflicting methods or even the first conflicting pair does not seem
worth the convenience it offers. This change is inline with what we
do with conflicting default values.
Before this commit, the specified storage method could be stored in
ColumnDef::storage (CREATE TABLE ... LIKE) or ColumnDef::storage_name
(CREATE TABLE ...). This caused the MergeChildAttribute() and
MergeInheritedAttribute() to ignore a storage method specified in the
child definition since it looked only at ColumnDef::storage. This
commit removes ColumnDef::storage and instead uses
ColumnDef::storage_name to save any storage method specification. This
is similar to how compression method specification is handled.
Author: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/24656cec-d6ef-4d15-8b5b-e8dfc9c833a7@eisentraut.org
This commit adds timeout that is expected to be used as a prevention
of long-running queries. Any session within the transaction will be
terminated after spanning longer than this timeout.
However, this timeout is not applied to prepared transactions.
Only transactions with user connections are affected.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAhFRxiQsRs2Eq5kCo9nXE3HTugsAAJdSQSmxncivebAxdmBjQ%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Andrey Borodin <amborodin@acm.org>
Author: Japin Li <japinli@hotmail.com>
Author: Junwang Zhao <zhjwpku@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Nikolay Samokhvalov <samokhvalov@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: bt23nguyent <bt23nguyent@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Yuhang Qiu <iamqyh@gmail.com>
Setting the environment variable PG_TEST_INITDB_EXTRA_OPTS passes
extra options to initdb run by pg_regress or
PostgreSQL::Test::Cluster's init.
This can be useful for a wide variety of uses, like running all tests
with checksums enabled, or with JIT enabled, or with different GUC
settings, or with different locale settings. (Not all tests are going
to pass with arbitrary options, but it is useful to run this against
specific test suites.)
Reviewed-by: Ian Lawrence Barwick <barwick@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d4d2ad9f-1c1d-47a1-bb4d-c10a747d4f15%40eisentraut.org
Presently, we rely on each individual signal handler to save the
initial value of errno and then restore it before returning if
needed. This is easily forgotten and, if missed, often goes
undetected for a long time.
In commit 3b00fdba9f, we introduced a wrapper signal handler
function that checks whether MyProcPid matches getpid(). This
commit moves the aforementioned errno restoration code from the
individual signal handlers to the new wrapper handler so that we no
longer need to worry about missing it.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Noah Misch
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231121212008.GA3742740%40nathanxps13
The pgcrypto docs contained a set of links for useful reading and
technical references. These sets of links were however not actively
curated and had stale content and dead links. Rather than investing
time into maintining these, this removes them altogether since there
are lots of resources online which are actively maintained.
Backpatch to all supported versions since these links have been in
the docs for a long time.
Reported-by: Hanefi Onaldi <hanefi.onaldi@microsoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander <magnus@hagander.net>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/170774255387.3279713.2822272755998870925@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: v12
This commit introduces a new SQL function pg_sync_replication_slots()
which is used to synchronize the logical replication slots from the
primary server to the physical standby so that logical replication can be
resumed after a failover or planned switchover.
A new 'synced' flag is introduced in pg_replication_slots view, indicating
whether the slot has been synchronized from the primary server. On a
standby, synced slots cannot be dropped or consumed, and any attempt to
perform logical decoding on them will result in an error.
The logical replication slots on the primary can be synchronized to the
hot standby by using the 'failover' parameter of
pg-create-logical-replication-slot(), or by using the 'failover' option of
CREATE SUBSCRIPTION during slot creation, and then calling
pg_sync_replication_slots() on standby. For the synchronization to work,
it is mandatory to have a physical replication slot between the primary
and the standby aka 'primary_slot_name' should be configured on the
standby, and 'hot_standby_feedback' must be enabled on the standby. It is
also necessary to specify a valid 'dbname' in the 'primary_conninfo'.
If a logical slot is invalidated on the primary, then that slot on the
standby is also invalidated.
If a logical slot on the primary is valid but is invalidated on the
standby, then that slot is dropped but will be recreated on the standby in
the next pg_sync_replication_slots() call provided the slot still exists
on the primary server. It is okay to recreate such slots as long as these
are not consumable on standby (which is the case currently). This
situation may occur due to the following reasons:
- The 'max_slot_wal_keep_size' on the standby is insufficient to retain
WAL records from the restart_lsn of the slot.
- 'primary_slot_name' is temporarily reset to null and the physical slot
is removed.
The slot synchronization status on the standby can be monitored using the
'synced' column of pg_replication_slots view.
A functionality to automatically synchronize slots by a background worker
and allow logical walsenders to wait for the physical will be done in
subsequent commits.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Shveta Malik, Ajin Cherian based on an earlier version by Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Bertrand Drouvot, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Nisha Moond, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
The macOS Finder application creates .DS_Store files in directories
when opened, which creates problems for serverside utilities which
expect all files to be PostgreSQL specific files. Skip these files
when encountered in pg_checksums, pg_rewind and pg_basebackup.
This was extracted from a larger patchset for skipping hidden files
and system files, where the concencus was to just skip these. Since
this is equally likely to happen in every version, backpatch to all
supported versions.
Reported-by: Mark Guertin <markguertin@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Tobias Bussmann <t.bussmann@gmx.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E258CE50-AB0E-455D-8AAD-BB4FE8F882FB@gmail.com
Backpatch-through: v12
Timezones are not immutable and so neither is any function that relies on
them. In commit 66ea94e8, we introduced a few methods which do casting
from one time to another and thus may involve the current timezone. To
preserve the immutability of jsonpath functions currently marked
immutable, disallow these methods from being called from non-TZ aware
functions.
Jeevan Chalke, per a report from Jian He.
Commit b0f0a9432d backpatched some code from upstream DocBook XSL to
our customization layer. It turned out that this failed to work with
anything but the latest DocBook XSL upstream version (1.79.*), because
the backpatched code references an XSLT parameter (autolink.index.see)
that is not defined in earlier versions (because the feature it is
used for did not exist yet).
There is no way in XSLT to test whether a parameter is declared before
the stylesheet processor tries and fails to access it. So the
possibilities to fix this would be to either remove the code that uses
the parameter (and thus give up on the feature it is used for) or
declare the parameter in our customization layer. The latter seems
easier, and with a few more lines of code we can backport the entire
autolink.index.see feature, so let's do that. (If we didn't, then
with older stylesheets the parameter will appear as on, but it won't
actually do anything, because of the way the stylesheets are laid out,
so it's less confusing to just make it work.)
With this, the documentation build should work again with docbook-xsl
versions 1.77.*, 1.78.*, and 1.79.* (which already worked before).
Version 1.76.1 already didn't work before all this, so was not
considered here.
Reported-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9077b779-a9f8-09c8-6e85-da1ebfba15af@eisentraut.org
Cover scram_iterations, which was added in commit b577743000. While
at it, turn the list into a <simplelist> with 2 columns, which is much
nicer to read.
In master, remove mentions of antediluvian versions before which some
parameters were not reported.
Noticed while investigating a question by Maiquel Grassi.
Backpatch to 16.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202401301236.mc5ebrohhtsd@alvherre.pgsql
Following are a few clean-ups related to failover option support in slots:
1. Improve the documentation in create_subscription.sgml.
2. Remove the spurious blank line in subscriptioncmds.c.
3. Remove the NOTICE for alter_replication_slot in subscriptioncmds.c as
we would sometimes print it even when nothing has changed. One can find
the change by enabling log_replication_commands on the publisher.
4. Optimize ReplicationSlotAlter() function to prevent disk flushing when
the slot's data remains unchanged.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB57164904651FB588A518E98894472@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
The pg_stat_io and pg_stat_copy_progress view docs spelled "I/O" as "IO"
or even "io" in some places when not referring to literal names or
string values.
Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87fry6lx5s.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
Role option management was changed in Postgres 16. This patch improves
the docs around these changes, including CREATE ROLE's INHERIT option,
inheritance handling, and grant's ability to change role options.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Zab9GiV63EENDcWG@momjian.us
Co-authored-by: David G. Johnston
Backpatch-through: 16
The Parameters subsection had an extra TRIGGER in the grammar
for DISABLE/ENABLE which is incorrect. Backpatch down to all
supported versions since it's been like this all along.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0AFB171E-7E78-4A90-A140-46AB270212CA@yesql.se
Backpatch-through: v12
The openssl command for displaying the DN of a client certificate was
using --subject and not the single-dash option -subject. While recent
versions of openssl handles double dash options, earlier does not so
fix by using just -subject (which is per the openssl documentation).
Backpatch to v14 where this was introduced.
Reported-by: konkove@gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/170672168899.666.10442618407194498217@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: v14
This was already documented in the CREATE INDEX reference, but not in
the introductory "Data Definition" chapter. Also, document that the
index that implements a constraint has the same name as the
constraint.
Author: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CACJufxFG682tYcP9aH_F-jrqq5End8MHZR77zcp1%3DDUrEsSu1Q%40mail.gmail.com
This commit introduces a new subscription option named 'failover', which
provides users with the ability to set the failover property of the
replication slot on the publisher when creating or altering a
subscription.
This uses the replication commands introduced by commit 7329240437 to
enable the failover option for a logical replication slot.
If the failover option is set to true, the associated replication slots
(i.e. the main slot and the table sync slots) in the upstream database are
enabled to be synchronized to the standbys. Note that the capability to
sync the replication slots will be added in subsequent commits.
Thanks to Masahiko Sawada for the design inputs.
Author: Shveta Malik, Hou Zhijie, Ajin Cherian
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Bertrand Drouvot, Dilip Kumar, Masahiko Sawada, Nisha Moond, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
We seem to have only documented a foreign key can reference the columns of
a primary key or unique constraint. Here we adjust the documentation
to mention columns in a non-partial unique index can be mentioned too.
The header comment for transformFkeyCheckAttrs() also didn't mention
unique indexes, so fix that too. In passing make that header comment
reflect reality in the various other aspects where it deviated from it.
Bug: 18295
Reported-by: Gilles PARC
Author: Laurenz Albe, David Rowley
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/18295-0ed0fac5c9f7b17b%40postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 12
This adds a new "Memory:" line under the "Planning:" group (which
currently only has "Buffers:") when the MEMORY option is specified.
In order to make the reporting reasonably accurate, we create a separate
memory context for planner activities, to be used only when this option
is given. The total amount of memory allocated by that context is
reported as "allocated"; we subtract memory in the context's freelists
from that and report that result as "used". We use
MemoryContextStatsInternal() to obtain the quantities.
The code structure to show buffer usage during planning was not in
amazing shape, so I (Álvaro) modified the patch a bit to clean that up
in passing.
Author: Ashutosh Bapat
Reviewed-by: David Rowley, Andrey Lepikhov, Jian He, Andy Fan
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAExHW5sZA=5LJ_ZPpRO-w09ck8z9p7eaYAqq3Ks9GDfhrxeWBw@mail.gmail.com
This function served to support having prebuilt files in the source
tree for vpath builds. This is no longer possible (since
721856ff24); all built files are now always in the build tree. The
invocations of this function are no longer required.
This commit implements a new replication command called
ALTER_REPLICATION_SLOT and a corresponding walreceiver API function named
walrcv_alter_slot. Additionally, the CREATE_REPLICATION_SLOT command has
been extended to support the failover option.
These new additions allow the modification of the failover property of a
replication slot on the publisher. A subsequent commit will make use of
these commands in subscription commands and will add the tests as well to
cover the functionality added/changed by this commit.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Shveta Malik
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Bertrand Drouvot, Dilip Kumar, Masahiko Sawada, Nisha Moond, Kuroda, Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
Formerly, these were only supported in to_char(), but there seems
little reason for that restriction. We should at least have enough
support to permit round-tripping the output of to_char().
In that spirit, TZ accepts either zone abbreviations or numeric
(HH or HH:MM) offsets, which are the cases that to_char() can output.
In an ideal world we'd make it take full zone names too, but
that seems like it'd introduce an unreasonable amount of ambiguity,
since the rules for POSIX-spec zone names are so lax.
OF is a subset of this, accepting only HH or HH:MM.
One small benefit of this improvement is that we can simplify
jsonpath's executeDateTimeMethod function, which no longer needs
to consider the HH and HH:MM cases separately. Moreover, letting
it accept zone abbreviations means it will accept "Z" to mean UTC,
which is emitted by JSON.stringify() for example.
Patch by me, reviewed by Aleksander Alekseev and Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1681086.1686673242@sss.pgh.pa.us
Clarify the behavior of jsonpath operators and functions by
describing their two different modes of operation explicitly.
In addition to the SQL-spec behavior, where a path returns
a list of matching items, we have a "predicate check" form
that always returns a single boolean result. That was mentioned
in only one place, but it seems better to annotate each operator
and function as to which form(s) it takes. Also improve the
examples by converting them into actual executable SQL with
results, and do a bunch of incidental wordsmithing.
David Wheeler, reviewed by Erik Wienhold, Jian He, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7262A188-59CA-4A8A-AAD7-83D4FF0B9758@justatheory.com
This commit implements ithe jsonpath .bigint(), .boolean(),
.date(), .decimal([precision [, scale]]), .integer(), .number(),
.string(), .time(), .time_tz(), .timestamp(), and .timestamp_tz()
methods.
.bigint() converts the given JSON string or a numeric value to
the bigint type representation.
.boolean() converts the given JSON string, numeric, or boolean
value to the boolean type representation. In the numeric case, only
integers are allowed. We use the parse_bool() backend function
to convert a string to a bool.
.decimal([precision [, scale]]) converts the given JSON string
or a numeric value to the numeric type representation. If precision
and scale are provided for .decimal(), then it is converted to the
equivalent numeric typmod and applied to the numeric number.
.integer() and .number() convert the given JSON string or a
numeric value to the int4 and numeric type representation.
.string() uses the datatype's output function to convert numeric
and various date/time types to the string representation.
The JSON string representing a valid date/time is converted to the
specific date or time type representation using jsonpath .date(),
.time(), .time_tz(), .timestamp(), .timestamp_tz() methods. The
changes use the infrastructure of the .datetime() method and perform
the datatype conversion as appropriate. Unlike the .datetime()
method, none of these methods accept a format template and use ISO
DateTime format instead. However, except for .date(), the
date/time related methods take an optional precision to adjust the
fractional seconds.
Jeevan Chalke, reviewed by Peter Eisentraut and Andrew Dunstan.
This commit adds the failover property to the replication slot. The
failover property indicates whether the slot will be synced to the standby
servers, enabling the resumption of corresponding logical replication
after failover. But note that this commit does not yet include the
capability to sync the replication slot; the subsequent commits will add
that capability.
A new optional parameter 'failover' is added to the
pg_create_logical_replication_slot() function. We will also enable to set
'failover' option for slots via the subscription commands in the
subsequent commits.
The value of the 'failover' flag is displayed as part of
pg_replication_slots view.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Shveta Malik, Ajin Cherian
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Bertrand Drouvot, Dilip Kumar, Masahiko Sawada, Nisha Moond, Kuroda, Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
9e2d870119 enabled the COPY command to skip malformed data, however
there was no visibility into how many tuples were actually skipped
during the COPY FROM.
This commit adds a new "tuples_skipped" column to
pg_stat_progress_copy view to report the number of tuples that were
skipped because they contain malformed data.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d12fd8c99adcae2744212cb23feff6ed%40oss.nttdata.com
Add WITHOUT OVERLAPS clause to PRIMARY KEY and UNIQUE constraints.
These are backed by GiST indexes instead of B-tree indexes, since they
are essentially exclusion constraints with = for the scalar parts of
the key and && for the temporal part.
Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
This change adds a new meta-command called \syncpipeline to pgbench,
able to send a sync message without flushing using the new libpq
function PQsendPipelineSync().
This meta-command is available within a block made of \startpipeline and
\endpipeline.
Author: Anthonin Bonnefoy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAO6_XqpcNhW6LZHLF-2NpPzdTbyMm4-RVkr3+AP5cOKSm9hrWA@mail.gmail.com
This adds a Node *escontext parameter to it and a bunch of functions
downstream to it, replacing any ereport()s in that path by either
errsave() or ereturn() as appropriate. This also adds code to those
functions where necessary to return early upon encountering a soft
error.
The changes here are mainly intended to suppress errors in the
functions of jsonfuncs.c. Functions in any external modules, such as
arrayfuncs.c, that those functions may in turn call are not changed
here based on the assumption that the various checks in jsonfuncs.c
functions should ensure that only values that are structurally valid
get passed to the functions in those external modules. An exception
is made for domain_check() to allow handling domain constraint
violation errors softly.
For testing, this adds a function jsonb_populate_record_valid(),
which returns true if jsonb_populate_record() would finish without
causing an error for the provided JSON object, false otherwise. Note
that jsonb_populate_record() internally calls populate_record(),
which in turn uses populate_record_field().
Extracted from a much larger patch to add SQL/JSON query functions.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund,
Alexander Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers,
Zihong Yu, Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby,
Álvaro Herrera, Jian He, Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqHROpf9e644D8BRqYvaAPmgBZVup-xKMDPk-nd4EpgzHw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
AM was used throughout the documentation to denote Access Method, but
the acronym was not described. This adds an acronym entry as well as
a glossary term which the acronym links to. Each page which describe
AMs have the first occurrence with <acronym> markup.
Reported-by: alaa.attya91@gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/169974408805.398198.6927340566912872957@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Injection points are a new facility that makes possible for developers
to run custom code in pre-defined code paths. Its goal is to provide
ways to design and run advanced tests, for cases like:
- Race conditions, where processes need to do actions in a controlled
ordered manner.
- Forcing a state, like an ERROR, FATAL or even PANIC for OOM, to force
recovery, etc.
- Arbitrary sleeps.
This implements some basics, and there are plans to extend it more in
the future depending on what's required. Hence, this commit adds a set
of routines in the backend that allows developers to attach, detach and
run injection points:
- A code path calling an injection point can be declared with the macro
INJECTION_POINT(name).
- InjectionPointAttach() and InjectionPointDetach() to respectively
attach and detach a callback to/from an injection point. An injection
point name is registered in a shmem hash table with a library name and a
function name, which will be used to load the callback attached to an
injection point when its code path is run.
Injection point names are just strings, so as an injection point can be
declared and run by out-of-core extensions and modules, with callbacks
defined in external libraries.
This facility is hidden behind a dedicated switch for ./configure and
meson, disabled by default.
Note that backends use a local cache to store callbacks already loaded,
cleaning up their cache if a callback has found to be removed on a
best-effort basis. This could be refined further but any tests but what
we have here was fine with the tests I've written while implementing
these backend APIs.
Author: Michael Paquier, with doc suggestions from Ashutosh Bapat.
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat, Nathan Bossart, Álvaro Herrera, Dilip
Kumar, Amul Sul, Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZTiV8tn_MIb_H2rE@paquier.xyz
Presently, the most straightforward way for a shared library to use
shared memory is to request it at server startup via a
shmem_request_hook, which requires specifying the library in
shared_preload_libraries. Alternatively, the library can create a
dynamic shared memory (DSM) segment, but absent a shared location
to store the segment's handle, other backends cannot use it. This
commit introduces a registry for DSM segments so that these other
backends can look up existing segments with a library-specified
string. This allows libraries to easily use shared memory without
needing to request it at server startup.
The registry is accessed via the new GetNamedDSMSegment() function.
This function handles allocating the segment and initializing it
via a provided callback. If another backend already created and
initialized the segment, it simply attaches the segment.
GetNamedDSMSegment() locks the registry appropriately to ensure
that only one backend initializes the segment and that all other
backends just attach it.
The registry itself is comprised of a dshash table that stores the
DSM segment handles keyed by a library-specified string.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Andrei Lepikhov, Nikita Malakhov, Robert Haas, Bharath Rupireddy, Zhang Mingli, Amul Sul
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231205034647.GA2705267%40nathanxps13
Presently, this section meanders through a few different features,
and the text itself is terse. This commit attempts to improve
matters by splitting the section into smaller sections and by
expanding the text for clarity. This is preparatory work for a
follow-up commit that will introduce a way for libraries to use
shared memory without needing to request it at startup time.
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Bharath Rupireddy, Abhijit Menon-Sen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240112041430.GA3557928%40nathanxps13
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231205034647.GA2705267%40nathanxps13
This is support function 12 for the GiST AM and translates
"well-known" RT*StrategyNumber values into whatever strategy number is
used by the opclass (since no particular numbers are actually
required). We will use this to support temporal PRIMARY
KEY/UNIQUE/FOREIGN KEY/FOR PORTION OF functionality.
This commit adds two implementations, one for internal GiST opclasses
(just an identity function) and another for btree_gist opclasses. It
updates btree_gist from 1.7 to 1.8, adding the support function for
all its opclasses.
Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
This commit adds some notes about the inability to remove superuser
privileges from the bootstrap superuser. This has been blocked
since commit e530be2c5c, but it wasn't intended be a supported
feature before that, either.
In passing, change "bootstrap user" to "bootstrap superuser" in a
couple places.
Author: Yurii Rashkovskii
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BRLCQzSx_eTC2Fch0EzeNHD3zFUcPvBYOoB%2BpPScFLch1DEQw%40mail.gmail.com
Currently, when source data contains unexpected data regarding data type or
range, the entire COPY fails. However, in some cases, such data can be ignored
and just copying normal data is preferable.
This commit adds a new option SAVE_ERROR_TO, which specifies where to save the
error information. When this option is specified, COPY skips soft errors and
continues copying.
Currently, SAVE_ERROR_TO only supports "none". This indicates error information
is not saved and COPY just skips the unexpected data and continues running.
Later works are expected to add more choices, such as 'log' and 'table'.
Author: Damir Belyalov, Atsushi Torikoshi, Alex Shulgin, Jian He
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87k31ftoe0.fsf_-_%40commandprompt.com
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule, Andres Freund, Tom Lane, Daniel Gustafsson,
Reviewed-by: Alena Rybakina, Andy Fan, Andrei Lepikhov, Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, Atsushi Torikoshi
Previously, identity columns were disallowed on partitioned tables.
(The reason was mainly that no one had gotten around to working
through all the details to make it work.) This makes it work now.
Some details on the behavior:
* A newly created partition inherits identity property
The partitions of a partitioned table are integral part of the
partitioned table. A partition inherits identity columns from the
partitioned table. An identity column of a partition shares the
identity space with the corresponding column of the partitioned
table. In other words, the same identity column across all
partitions of a partitioned table share the same identity space.
This is effected by sharing the same underlying sequence.
When INSERTing directly into a partition, the sequence associated
with the topmost partitioned table is used to calculate the value of
the corresponding identity column.
In regular inheritance, identity columns and their properties in a
child table are independent of those in its parent tables. A child
table does not inherit identity columns or their properties
automatically from the parent. (This is unchanged.)
* Attached partition inherits identity column
A table being attached as a partition inherits the identity property
from the partitioned table. This should be fine since we expect
that the partition table's column has the same type as the
partitioned table's corresponding column. If the table being
attached is a partitioned table, the identity properties are
propagated down its partition hierarchy.
An identity column in the partitioned table is also marked as NOT
NULL. The corresponding column in the partition needs to be marked
as NOT NULL for the attach to succeed.
* Drop identity property when detaching partition
A partition's identity column shares the identity space
(i.e. underlying sequence) as the corresponding column of the
partitioned table. If a partition is detached it can longer share
the identity space as before. Hence the identity columns of the
partition being detached loose their identity property.
When identity of a column of a regular table is dropped it retains
the NOT NULL constraint that came with the identity property.
Similarly the columns of the partition being detached retain the NOT
NULL constraints that came with identity property, even though the
identity property itself is lost.
The sequence associated with the identity property is linked to the
partitioned table (and not the partition being detached). That
sequence is not dropped as part of detach operation.
* Partitions with their own identity columns are not allowed.
* The usual ALTER operations (add identity column, add identity
property to existing column, alter properties of an indentity
column, drop identity property) are supported for partitioned
tables. Changing a column only in a partitioned table or a
partition is not allowed; the change needs to be applied to the
whole partition hierarchy.
Author: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAExHW5uOykuTC+C6R1yDSp=o8Q83jr8xJdZxgPkxfZ1Ue5RRGg@mail.gmail.com
One instance of "WITH clause" was not using <literal> tags around
WITH, while others were, so add markup to the last one to ensure
consistency. Backpatch to v15 where MERGE was added.
Reported-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxGJKY9ZCPV2WDM6xFsXq9C8r7r3vU6AkScN+p9k6CEpMw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: v15
This seems to be missing since identity column support was added. Add
the same. This gives a place to document various pieces of
information in one place that are currently distributed over several
command reference pages or just not documented (e.g., inheritance
behavior).
Author: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAExHW5uOykuTC+C6R1yDSp=o8Q83jr8xJdZxgPkxfZ1Ue5RRGg@mail.gmail.com
This new function is equivalent to PQpipelineSync(), except that it does
not flush anything to the server except if the size threshold of the
output buffer is reached; the user must subsequently call PQflush()
instead.
Its purpose is to reduce the system call overhead of pipeline mode, by
giving to applications more control over the timing of the flushes when
manipulating commands in pipeline mode.
Author: Anton Kirilov
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio, Robert Haas, Álvaro Herrera, Denis
Laxalde, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACV6eE5arHFZEA717=iKEa_OewpVFfWJOmsOdGrqqsr8CJVfWQ@mail.gmail.com
This changes the pg_attribute field attstattarget into a nullable
field in the variable-length part of the row. If no value is set by
the user for attstattarget, it is now null instead of previously -1.
This saves space in pg_attribute and tuple descriptors for most
practical scenarios. (ATTRIBUTE_FIXED_PART_SIZE is reduced from 108
to 104.) Also, null is the semantically more correct value.
The ANALYZE code internally continues to represent the default
statistics target by -1, so that that code can avoid having to deal
with null values. But that is now contained to the ANALYZE code.
Only the DDL code deals with attstattarget possibly null.
For system columns, the field is now always null. The ANALYZE code
skips system columns anyway.
To set a column's statistics target to the default value, the new
command form ALTER TABLE ... SET STATISTICS DEFAULT can be used. (SET
STATISTICS -1 still works.)
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4da8d211-d54d-44b9-9847-f2a9f1184c76@eisentraut.org
A superuser may create a subscription with password_required=true, but
which uses a connection string without a password.
Previously, if the owner of such a subscription was changed to a
non-superuser, the non-superuser was able to utilize a password from
another source (like a password file or the PGPASSWORD environment
variable), which should not have been allowed.
This commit adds a step to re-validate the connection string before
connecting.
Reported-by: Jeff Davis
Author: Vignesh C
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Robert Haas, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/e5892973ae2a80a1a3e0266806640dae3c428100.camel%40j-davis.com
Backpatch-through: 16
This can dump the contents of the WAL summary files found in
pg_wal/summaries. Normally, this shouldn't really be something anyone
needs to do, but it may be needed for debugging problems with
incremental backup, or could possibly be useful to external tools.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobvqqj-DW9F7uUzT-cQqs6wcVb-Xhs=w=hzJnXSE-kRGw@mail.gmail.com
This makes it possible to access information about the progress
of WAL summarization from SQL. The previously-added functions
pg_available_wal_summaries() and pg_wal_summary_contents() only
examine on-disk state, but this function exposes information from
the server's shared memory.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobvqqj-DW9F7uUzT-cQqs6wcVb-Xhs=w=hzJnXSE-kRGw@mail.gmail.com
UNIQUE and PRIMARY KEY constraints can be created on ONLY the
partitioned table. We already had an example demonstrating that,
but forgot to mention it in the documentation of the limits of
partitioning.
Author: Laurenz Albe
Reviewed-By: shihao zhong, Shubham Khanna, Ashutosh Bapat
Backpatch-through: 12
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/167299368731.659.16130012959616771853@wrigleys.postgresql.org
The documentation for this parameter lists its type as boolean, but
it is actually an integer. Furthermore, there is no mention of how
the value is interpreted when specified without units. This commit
fixes these oversights in commit 174c480508.
Co-authored-by: Hubert Depesz Lubaczewski
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZZwkujFihO2uqKwp%40depesz.com
Essentially this moves the non-interactive part of psql's "\password"
command into an exported client function. The password is not sent to the
server in cleartext because it is "encrypted" (in the case of scram and md5
it is actually hashed, but we have called these encrypted passwords for a
long time now) on the client side. This is good because it ensures the
cleartext password is never known by the server, and therefore won't end up
in logs, pg_stat displays, etc.
In other words, it exists for the same reason as PQencryptPasswordConn(), but
is more convenient as it both builds and runs the "ALTER USER" command for
you. PQchangePassword() uses PQencryptPasswordConn() to do the password
encryption. PQencryptPasswordConn() is passed a NULL for the algorithm
argument, hence encryption is done according to the server's
password_encryption setting.
Also modify the psql client to use the new function. That provides a builtin
test case. Ultimately drivers built on top of libpq should expose this
function and its use should be generally encouraged over doing ALTER USER
directly for password changes.
Author: Joe Conway
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/b75955f7-e8cc-4bbd-817f-ef536bacbe93%40joeconway.com
The note regarding character encoding form in "The Information Schema"
said that LATIN1 character repertoires only use one encoding form
LATIN1. This is not correct because LATIN1 has another encoding form
ISO-2022-JP-2. To fix this, replace LATIN1 with LATIN2, which is not
supported by ISO-2022-JP-2, thus it can be said that LATIN2 only uses
one encoding form.
Back-patch to supported branches.
Author: Tatsuo Ishii
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/20240102.153925.1147403616414525145.t-ishii%40sranhm.sra.co.jp
This replaces dblink's blocking libpq calls, allowing cancellation and
allowing DROP DATABASE (of a database not involved in the query). Apart
from explicit dblink_cancel_query() calls, dblink still doesn't cancel
the remote side. The replacement for the blocking calls consists of
new, general-purpose query execution wrappers in the libpqsrv facility.
Out-of-tree extensions should adopt these. Use them in postgres_fdw,
replacing a local implementation from which the libpqsrv implementation
derives. This is a bug fix for dblink. Code inspection identified the
bug at least thirteen years ago, but user complaints have not appeared.
Hence, no back-patch for now.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231122012945.74@rfd.leadboat.com
This adds a new ALTER TABLE subcommand ALTER COLUMN ... SET EXPRESSION
that changes the generation expression of a generated column.
The syntax is not standard but was adapted from other SQL
implementations.
This command causes a table rewrite, using the usual ALTER TABLE
mechanisms. The implementation is similar to and makes use of some of
the infrastructure of the SET DATA TYPE subcommand (for example,
rebuilding constraints and indexes afterwards). The new command
requires a new pass in AlterTablePass, and the ADD COLUMN pass had to
be moved earlier so that combinations of ADD COLUMN and SET EXPRESSION
can work.
Author: Amul Sul <sulamul@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAJ_b94yyJeGA-5M951_Lr+KfZokOp-2kXicpmEhi5FXhBeTog@mail.gmail.com
This patch changes the existing 'conflicting' field to 'conflict_reason'
in pg_replication_slots. This new field indicates the reason for the
logical slot's conflict with recovery. It is always NULL for physical
slots, as well as for logical slots which are not invalidated. The
non-NULL values indicate that the slot is marked as invalidated. Possible
values are:
wal_removed = required WAL has been removed.
rows_removed = required rows have been removed.
wal_level_insufficient = the primary doesn't have a wal_level sufficient
to perform logical decoding.
The existing users of 'conflicting' column can get the same answer by
using 'conflict_reason' IS NOT NULL.
Author: Shveta Malik
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Bertrand Drouvot, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZYOE8IguqTbp-seF@paquier.xyz
The "vertexes" spelling is also valid, but we consistently use
"vertices" elsewhere.
Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
Reviewed-by: Shubham Khanna
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87le9fmi01.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
This reverts commit 283a95da92.
The reordering of JsonPathItemType affects the binary on-disk
compatibility of the jsonpath type, so we must not change it. Revert
for now and consider.
This feature will allow us to replicate the changes on subscriber nodes
after the upgrade.
Previously, only the subscription metadata information was preserved.
Without the list of relations and their state, it's not possible to
re-enable the subscriptions without missing some records as the list of
relations can only be refreshed after enabling the subscription (and
therefore starting the apply worker). Even if we added a way to refresh
the subscription while enabling a publication, we still wouldn't know
which relations are new on the publication side, and therefore should be
fully synced, and which shouldn't.
To preserve the subscription relations, this patch teaches pg_dump to
restore the content of pg_subscription_rel from the old cluster by using
binary_upgrade_add_sub_rel_state SQL function. This is supported only
in binary upgrade mode.
The subscription's replication origin is needed to ensure that we don't
replicate anything twice.
To preserve the replication origins, this patch teaches pg_dump to update
the replication origin along with creating a subscription by using
binary_upgrade_replorigin_advance SQL function to restore the
underlying replication origin remote LSN. This is supported only in
binary upgrade mode.
pg_upgrade will check that all the subscription relations are in 'i'
(init) or in 'r' (ready) state and will error out if that's not the case,
logging the reason for the failure. This helps to avoid the risk of any
dangling slot or origin after the upgrade.
Author: Vignesh C, Julien Rouhaud, Shlok Kyal
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier, Amit Kapila, Hayato Kuroda
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230217075433.u5mjly4d5cr4hcfe@jrouhaud
When enabled (default off), this logs a backtrace anytime elog() or an
equivalent ereport() for internal errors is called.
This is not well covered by the existing backtrace_functions, because
there are many equally-worded low-level errors in many functions. And
if you find out where the error is, then you need to manually rewrite
the elog() to ereport() to attach the errbacktrace(), which is
annoying. Having a backtrace automatically on every elog() call could
be very helpful during development for various kinds of common errors
from palloc, syscache, node support, etc.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/ba76c6bc-f03f-4285-bf16-47759cfcab9e@eisentraut.org
There are a lot of Perl scripts in the tree, mostly code generation
and TAP tests. Occasionally, these scripts produce warnings. These
are probably always mistakes on the developer side (true positives).
Typical examples are warnings from genbki.pl or related when you make
a mess in the catalog files during development, or warnings from tests
when they massage a config file that looks different on different
hosts, or mistakes during merges (e.g., duplicate subroutine
definitions), or just mistakes that weren't noticed because there is a
lot of output in a verbose build.
This changes all warnings into fatal errors, by replacing
use warnings;
by
use warnings FATAL => 'all';
in all Perl files.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/06f899fd-1826-05ab-42d6-adeb1fd5e200%40eisentraut.org
The documentation has been missing one value in the list of catalog OIDs
that can be given to the validator function of a FDW, as of
AttributeRelationId, when changing the attribute options of a foreign
table.
Author: Ian Lawrence Barwick
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB8KJ=i16t2yJU_Pq2Z+hnNGWFhagp_bJmzxHZu3ZkOjZm-+rQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 12
Bhis commit introduces enhancements to the pg_stat_checkpointer view by adding
three new columns: restartpoints_timed, restartpoints_req, and
restartpoints_done. These additions aim to improve the visibility and
monitoring of restartpoint processes on replicas.
Previously, it was challenging to differentiate between successful and failed
restartpoint requests. This limitation arises because restartpoints on replicas
are dependent on checkpoint records from the primary, and cannot occur more
frequently than these checkpoints.
The new columns allow for clear distinction and tracking of restartpoint
requests, their triggers, and successful completions. This enhancement aids
database administrators and developers in better understanding and diagnosing
issues related to restartpoint behavior, particularly in scenarios where
restartpoint requests may fail.
System catalog is changed. Catversion is bumped.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/99b2ccd1-a77a-962a-0837-191cdf56c2b9%40inbox.ru
Author: Anton A. Melnikov
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Alexander Korotkov
Up to now, our distribution tarballs have included a plain-text form
of the installation.sgml chapter. The rationale for that was that a
recipient might not have either ready internet access or HTML-viewing
tools; a theory that seems downright quaint today. Maintaining the
ability to generate this file is not without cost, because it puts
special requirements on installation.sgml that are often overlooked.
Moreover, we are moving in the direction of making our distribution
tarballs be pure git snapshots for traceability/reproducibility
reasons; including generated files doesn't fit into that plan.
Hence, let's just drop INSTALL and remove the infrastructure for
generating it. The top-level README will now recommend visiting
our website to see the installation instructions. As a useful
side-effect, we can get rid of README.git which has provoked
confusion.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231220114927.faccqqprmuyrzdip@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e07408d9-e5f2-d9fd-5672-f53354e9305e@eisentraut.org
To take an incremental backup, you use the new replication command
UPLOAD_MANIFEST to upload the manifest for the prior backup. This
prior backup could either be a full backup or another incremental
backup. You then use BASE_BACKUP with the INCREMENTAL option to take
the backup. pg_basebackup now has an --incremental=PATH_TO_MANIFEST
option to trigger this behavior.
An incremental backup is like a regular full backup except that
some relation files are replaced with files with names like
INCREMENTAL.${ORIGINAL_NAME}, and the backup_label file contains
additional lines identifying it as an incremental backup. The new
pg_combinebackup tool can be used to reconstruct a data directory
from a full backup and a series of incremental backups.
Patch by me. Reviewed by Matthias van de Meent, Dilip Kumar, Jakub
Wartak, Peter Eisentraut, and Álvaro Herrera. Thanks especially to
Jakub for incredibly helpful and extensive testing.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYOYZfMCyOXFyC-P+-mdrZqm5pP2N7S-r0z3_402h9rsA@mail.gmail.com
When active, this process writes WAL summary files to
$PGDATA/pg_wal/summaries. Each summary file contains information for a
certain range of LSNs on a certain TLI. For each relation, it stores a
"limit block" which is 0 if a relation is created or destroyed within
a certain range of WAL records, or otherwise the shortest length to
which the relation was truncated during that range of WAL records, or
otherwise InvalidBlockNumber. In addition, it stores a list of blocks
which have been modified during that range of WAL records, but
excluding blocks which were removed by truncation after they were
modified and never subsequently modified again.
In other words, it tells us which blocks need to copied in case of an
incremental backup covering that range of WAL records. But this
doesn't yet add the capability to actually perform an incremental
backup; the next patch will do that.
A new parameter summarize_wal enables or disables this new background
process. The background process also automatically deletes summary
files that are older than wal_summarize_keep_time, if that parameter
has a non-zero value and the summarizer is configured to run.
Patch by me, with some design help from Dilip Kumar and Andres Freund.
Reviewed by Matthias van de Meent, Dilip Kumar, Jakub Wartak, Peter
Eisentraut, and Álvaro Herrera.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYOYZfMCyOXFyC-P+-mdrZqm5pP2N7S-r0z3_402h9rsA@mail.gmail.com
This commit removes all the scripts located in src/tools/msvc/ to build
PostgreSQL with Visual Studio on Windows, meson becoming the recommended
way to achieve that. The scripts held some information that is still
relevant with meson, information kept and moved to better locations.
Comments that referred directly to the scripts are removed.
All the documentation still relevant that was in install-windows.sgml
has been moved to installation.sgml under a new subsection for Visual.
All the content specific to the scripts is removed. Some adjustments
for the documentation are planned in a follow-up set of changes.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZQzp_VMJcerM1Cs_@paquier.xyz
The example for dropping an option was incorrectly quoting the
option key thus making it a value turning the command into an
unqualified ADD operation. The result of dropping became adding
a new key/value pair instead:
d=# alter foreign data wrapper f options (drop 'b');
ALTER FOREIGN DATA WRAPPER
d=# select fdwoptions from pg_foreign_data_wrapper where fdwname='f';
fdwoptions
------------
{drop=b}
(1 row)
This has been incorrect for a long time so backpatch to all
supported branches.
Author: Tim <tim.needham2@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/170292280173.1876505.5204623074024041738@wrigleys.postgresql.org
smgrreadv() and smgrwritev() and their md.c implementations call
FileReadV() and FileWriteV(). A range of disk blocks beginning at
'blocknum' and extending for 'nblocks' can be scattered to or gathered
from multiple buffers with a single system call. The traditional
smgrread() and smgrwrite() functions are implemented in terms of the new
functions.
Later commits will introduce calls with nblocks > 1, but the following
behavioral changes can be seen already:
* After a short transfer we'll now retry until we eventually read 0
bytes (= EOF) or get ENOSPC, EDQUOT, EFBIG etc, where previously we
would infer the reason. Retrying is consistent with xlog.c's
treatment of large WAL writes, and arguably also xlog.c and fd.c's
treatment of EINTR. Arbitrary short returns for larger transfers have
been observed on several OSes, and might in theory also happen for
transient reasons with our own pg_p*v() fallback code.
* After unexpected EOF or -1, the error thrown now talks about
a range even for the single block case, eg "blocks 42..42".
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJkOiOCa+mag4BF+zHo7qo=o9CFheB8=g6uT5TUm2gkvA@mail.gmail.com
We didn't explain this clearly until somewhere deep in the
"Extending SQL" chapter, but really it ought to be mentioned
in the introductory material too.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4097442.1694967650@sss.pgh.pa.us
This GUC was intended as a debugging help in the 9.0 area when hot
standby and streaming replication were being developped, able to offer
more information at LOG level rather than DEBUGn. There are more tools
available these days that are able to offer rather equivalent
information, like pg_waldump introduced in 9.3. It is not obvious how
this facility is useful these days, so let's remove it.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZXEXEAUVFrvpquSd@paquier.xyz
Allow using multiple worker processes to build BRIN index, which until
now was supported only for BTREE indexes. For large tables this often
results in significant speedup when the build is CPU-bound.
The work is split in a simple way - each worker builds BRIN summaries on
a subset of the table, determined by the regular parallel scan used to
read the data, and feeds them into a shared tuplesort which sorts them
by blkno (start of the range). The leader then reads this sorted stream
of ranges, merges duplicates (which may happen if the parallel scan does
not align with BRIN pages_per_range), and adds the resulting ranges into
the index.
The number of duplicate results produced by workers (requiring merging
in the leader process) should be fairly small, thanks to how parallel
scans assign chunks to workers. The likelihood of duplicate results may
increase for higher pages_per_range values, but then there are fewer
page ranges in total. In any case, we expect the merging to be much
cheaper than summarization, so this should be a win.
Most of the parallelism infrastructure is a simplified copy of the code
used by BTREE indexes, omitting the parts irrelevant for BRIN indexes
(e.g. uniqueness checks).
This also introduces a new index AM flag amcanbuildparallel, determining
whether to attempt to start parallel workers for the index build.
Original patch by me, with reviews and substantial reworks by Matthias
van de Meent, certainly enough to make him a co-author.
Author: Tomas Vondra, Matthias van de Meent
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c2ee7d69-ce17-43f2-d1a0-9811edbda6e6%40enterprisedb.com
This commit adds support for REINDEX in event triggers, making this
command react for the events ddl_command_start and ddl_command_end. The
indexes rebuilt are collected with the ReindexStmt emitted by the
caller, for the concurrent and non-concurrent paths.
Thanks to that, it is possible to know a full list of the indexes that a
single REINDEX command has worked on.
Author: Garrett Thornburg, Jian He
Reviewed-by: Jim Jones, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEEqfk5bm32G7sbhzHbES9WejD8O8DCEOaLkxoBP7HNWxjPpvg@mail.gmail.com
The wording changed here comes from 991bfe11d2, when the only way to
trigger a promotion was with a trigger file. There are more options to
achieve this operation these days, like the SQL function pg_promote() or
the command `pg_ctl promote`, so it is confusing to assume that only a
trigger file is able to do the work.
Note also that promote_trigger_file has been removed as of cd4329d939
in 16~.
Author: Shinya Kato
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/201b08ea29aa61f96162080e75be503c@oss.nttdata.com
Backpatch-through: 12
The test module includes helper functions to quickly burn through lots
of XIDs. They are used in the tests, and are also handy for manually
testing XID wraparound.
Since these tests are very expensive the entire suite is disabled by
default. It requires to set PG_TEST_EXTRA to run it.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson, John Naylor, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: vignesh C
Author: Heikki Linnakangas, Masahiko Sawada, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAD21AoDVhkXp8HjpFO-gp3TgL6tCKcZQNxn04m01VAtcSi-5sA%40mail.gmail.com
When there is a need to filter multiple tables with include and/or exclude
options it's quite possible to run into the limitations of the commandline.
This adds a --filter=FILENAME feature to pg_dump, pg_dumpall and pg_restore
which is used to supply a file containing object exclude/include commands
which work just like their commandline counterparts. The format of the file
is one command per row like:
<command> <object> <objectpattern>
<command> can be "include" or "exclude", <object> can be table_data, index
table_data_and_children, database, extension, foreign_data, function, table
schema, table_and_children or trigger.
This patch has gone through many revisions and design changes over a long
period of time, the list of reviewers reflect reviewers of some version of
the patch, not necessarily the final version.
Patch by Pavel Stehule with some additional hacking by me.
Author: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Erik Rijkers <er@xs4all.nl>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRB10wvW0CC9Xq=1XDs=zCQxer3cbLcNZa+qiX4cUH-G_A@mail.gmail.com
This avoids the wraparound in async.c and removes the corresponding code
complexity. The maximum amount of allocated SLRU pages for NOTIFY / LISTEN
queue is now determined by the max_notify_queue_pages GUC. The default
value is 1048576. It allows to consume up to 8 GB of disk space which is
exactly the limit we had previously.
Author: Maxim Orlov, Aleksander Alekseev, Alexander Korotkov, Teodor Sigaev
Author: Nikita Glukhov, Pavel Borisov, Yura Sokolov
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion, Heikki Linnakangas, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Japin Li, Pavel Borisov, Tom Lane, Peter Eisentraut, Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Andrey Borodin, Dilip Kumar, Aleksander Alekseev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACG%3DezZe1NQSCnfHOr78AtAZxJZeCvxrts0ygrxYwe%3DpyyjVWA%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TPDOYBYrnCAeyndkBktO0WG2xSdYduTF0nxq%2BvfkmTF5Q%40mail.gmail.com
This patch adds 'stats_since' and 'minmax_stats_since' columns to the
pg_stat_statements view and pg_stat_statements() function. The new min/max
reset mode for the pg_stat_stetments_reset() function is controlled by the
parameter minmax_only.
'stat_since' column is populated with the current timestamp when a new
statement is added to the pg_stat_statements hashtable. It provides clean
information about statistics collection time intervals for each statement.
Besides it can be used by sampling solutions to detect situations when a
statement was evicted and stored again between samples.
Such a sampling solution could derive any pg_stat_statements statistic values
for an interval between two samples with the exception of all min/max
statistics. To address this issue this patch adds the ability to reset
min/max statistics independently of the statement reset using the new
minmax_only parameter of the pg_stat_statements_reset(userid oid, dbid oid,
queryid bigint, minmax_only boolean) function. The timestamp of such reset
is stored in the minmax_stats_since field for each statement.
pg_stat_statements_reset() function now returns the timestamp of a reset as the
result.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/72e80e7b160a6eb189df9ef6f068cce3765d37f8.camel%40moonset.ru
Author: Andrei Zubkov
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud, Hayato Kuroda, Yuki Seino, Chengxi Sun
Reviewed-by: Anton Melnikov, Darren Rush, Michael Paquier, Sergei Kornilov
Reviewed-by: Alena Rybakina, Andrei Lepikhov
Values corresponding to STATISTIC_KIND_RANGE_LENGTH_HISTOGRAM and
STATISTIC_KIND_BOUNDS_HISTOGRAM were not exposed to pg_stats when these
slot kinds were introduced in 918eee0c49.
This commit adds the missing fields to pg_stats.
Catversion is bumped.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/b67d8b57-9357-7e82-a2e7-f6ce6eaeec67@postgrespro.ru
Author: Egor Rogov, Soumyadeep Chakraborty
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby, Jian He
The brininsert code used to initialize (and destroy) BrinDesc and
BrinRevmap for each tuple, which is not free. This patch initializes
these structures only once, and reuses them for all inserts in the same
command. The data is passed through indexInfo->ii_AmCache.
This also introduces an optional AM callback "aminsertcleanup" that
allows performing custom cleanup in case simply pfree-ing ii_AmCache is
not sufficient (which is the case when the cache contains TupleDesc,
Buffers, and so on).
Author: Soumyadeep Chakraborty
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Matthias van de Meent, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAE-ML%2B9r2%3DaO1wwji1sBN9gvPz2xRAtFUGfnffpd0ZqyuzjamA%40mail.gmail.com
This commit log messages (at LOG level when log_replication_commands is
set, otherwise at DEBUG1 level) when walsenders acquire and release
replication slots. These messages help to know the lifetime of a
replication slot - one can know how long a streaming standby, logical
subscriber, or replication slot consumer is down. These messages will be
useful on production servers to debug and analyze inactive replication
slots.
Note that these messages are emitted only for walsenders but not for
backends. This is because walsenders are the ones that typically hold
replication slots for longer durations, unlike backends which hold them
for executing replication related functions.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Amit Kapila, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACX17G7F-jeLt+7KhJ6YxVeRwR8Zk0rDh4VnT546o0UpTQ@mail.gmail.com
Currently important build targets are somewhat hard to discover. This commit
documents important meson build targets in the sgml documentation. But it's
awkward to have to lookup build targets in the docs when hacking, so this also
adds a 'help' target, printing out the same information. To avoid having to
duplicate information in two places, generate both docbook and interactive
docs from a single source.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231108232121.ww542mt6lfo6f26f@awork3.anarazel.de
This undoes the change in what the 'docs' target builds 969509c3f2. Tom was
concerned with having a target to just build the html docs, which a prior
commit now provided explicitly.
A subsequent commit will overhaul the documentation for the documentation
targets.
While at it, move all target in doc/src/sgml/Makefile up to just after the
default "html" target, and add a comment explaining "all" is *not* the default
target.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230209203855.njrepiupc3rmehfw@awork3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231103163848.26egkh5qdgw3vmil@awork3.anarazel.de
We have toplevel html, man targets in the autoconf build as well. It'd be odd
to have an 'html' target but have the install target be 'install-doc-html',
thus rename the install targets to match.
Reviewed-by: Christoph Berg <myon@debian.org>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231103163848.26egkh5qdgw3vmil@awork3.anarazel.de
On the MERGE page, the description of the privileges required could be
taken to imply that the SELECT privilege is required on all columns of
the data source, whereas actually it is only required on the columns
referred to by conditions or expressions in the MERGE command. Re-word
it to make that a little clearer, and mention expressions as well as
conditions.
Also, add a glossary entry for MERGE, and nearby on the glossary page,
mention MERGE in the list of commands that cannot update a
materialized view.
Noted by Jian He. Patch by me, reviewed by Jian He.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxHuSoRXKwr0MtSFLXuT2nFVWcVfEWhxg7qdP9h%2Bs3a%2BUw%40mail.gmail.com
Previously --with-selinux was documented only in the in the sepgsql
documentation and there was no corresponding documentation for meson. There
are further improvements that could be made, but this change seems worthwhile
even on its own.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reported-by: Christoph Berg <myon@debian.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231103163848.26egkh5qdgw3vmil@awork3.anarazel.de
Currently, pg_stat_reset_shared() cannot reset the counters in the view
pg_stat_slru even if it is a type of shared stats. This patch adds
support for a new value in pg_stat_reset_shared(), called "slru", able
to do that. Note that pg_stat_reset_shared(NULL) also resets SLRU
counters.
There may be a point in removing pg_stat_reset_slru() that was
introduced in 28cac71bd3 (v13~) as the new option overlaps with this
function, but we would lose the ability to reset individual SLRU
counters. This is left for future reconsideration.
Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e3c25d72e81378e7b64f3c52e0306fc9@oss.nttdata.com
This adds support for infinity to the interval data type, using the
same input/output representation as the other date/time data types
that support infinity. This allows various arithmetic operations on
infinite dates, timestamps and intervals.
The new values are represented by setting all fields of the interval
to INT32/64_MIN for -infinity, and INT32/64_MAX for +infinity. This
ensures that they compare as less/greater than all other interval
values, without the need for any special-case comparison code.
Note that, since those 2 values were formerly accepted as legal finite
intervals, pg_upgrade and dump/restore from an old database will turn
them from finite to infinite intervals. That seems OK, since those
exact values should be extremely rare in practice, and they are
outside the documented range supported by the interval type, which
gives us a certain amount of leeway.
Bump catalog version.
Joseph Koshakow, Jian He, and Ashutosh Bapat, reviewed by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAvxfHea4%2BsPybKK7agDYOMo9N-Z3J6ZXf3BOM79pFsFNcRjwA%40mail.gmail.com
pg_stat_reset_slru currently requires an input argument, either:
- NULL to reset the SLRU counters of everything.
- A specific value to reset a single SLRU cache.
This commit adds support for a new pattern: pg_stat_reset_slru without
any argument works the same way as pg_stat_reset_slru(NULL), relying on
a DEFAULT in the function definition to handle this case. This makes
the function more consistent with 23c8c0c8f4.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACW1VizYg01EeH_cA-7qA+4NzWVAoZ5Lw9_XYO1RRHAZbA@mail.gmail.com
This was done particularly for geometric data types.
Reported-by: Christoph Berg
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YGI8Leuk0WvmNWLr@msg.df7cb.de
Co-authored-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Backpatch-through: master
Default privileges are represented as NULL::aclitem[] in catalog ACL
columns, while revoking all privileges leaves an empty aclitem[].
These two cases used to produce identical output in psql meta-commands
like \dp. Using something like "\pset null '(default)'" as a
workaround for spotting the difference did not work, because null
values were always displayed as empty strings by describe.c's
meta-commands.
This patch improves that with two changes:
1. Print "(none)" for empty privileges so that the user is able to
distinguish them from default privileges, even without special
workarounds.
2. Remove the special handling of null values in describe.c,
so that "\pset null" is honored like everywhere else.
(This affects all output from these commands, not only ACLs.)
The privileges shown by \dconfig+ and \ddp as well as the column
privileges shown by \dp are not affected by change #1, because the
respective aclitem[] is reset to NULL or deleted from the catalog
instead of leaving an empty array.
Erik Wienhold and Laurenz Albe
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1966228777.127452.1694979110595@office.mailbox.org
Clarify that default privileges are not inherited and reorder
paragraphs. This is a follow up to a recent ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES
doc patch.
Reported-by: Sanjay Minni
Diagnosed-by: AMpxBo=M35hcH1g4Vg=KRJ0-77FOJcvdrdiVF5KSOAdOG-LvKQ@mail.gmail.com
Co-authored-by: Laurenz Albe
Backpatch-through: 16
Rewrite array_in() and its subroutines so that we make only one
pass over the input text, rather than two. This requires
potentially re-pallocing the working arrays values[] and nulls[]
larger than our initial guess, but that cost will hopefully be made
up by avoiding duplicate parsing. In any case this coding seems
much clearer and more straightforward than what we had before.
This also fixes array_in() to reject non-rectangular input (that is,
different brace depths in different parts of the input) more reliably
than before, and to give a better error message when it does so.
This is analogous to the plpython and plperl fixes in 0553528e7 and
f47004add. Like those PLs, we now accept input such as '{{},{}}'
as a valid representation of an empty array, which we did not before.
Additionally, reject explicit array subscripts that are outside the
integer range (previously you just got whatever atoi() converted
them to), and make some other minor improvements in error reporting.
Although this is arguably a bug fix, it's also a behavioral change
that might trip somebody up, so no back-patch.
Tom Lane, Heikki Linnakangas, and Jian He. Thanks to Alexander Lakhin
for the initial report and for review/testing.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2794005.1683042087@sss.pgh.pa.us
One of the examples on the SELECT page was missing a semicolon from
a listing which has the look and feel of being a psql session. This
adds the missing semicolon and also removes the newline between the
query and results to match the other examples nearby.
Backpatch to all supported branches to avoid backpatching issues on
this page.
Reported-by: tim.needham2@gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/169965004097.225187.12941375915673151540@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: v12
Currently, pg_stat_reset_shared() can use an argument to specify the
target of statistics to reset, doing nothing for NULL as it is strict.
This patch adds to pg_stat_reset_shared() the possibility to reset all
the stats types already handled in this function rather than do nothing
if the argument value given is NULL or if nothing is specified
(proisstrict is switched to false). Like previously, SLRUs are not
included in what gets reset.
The idea to use NULL or no argument to control if all the shared stats
already covered by this function should be reset has been proposed by
Andres Freund.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier, Bharath Rupireddy,
Matthias van de Meent
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4291a55137ddda77cf7cc5f46e846daf@oss.nttdata.com
A PostgreSQL release tarball contains a number of prebuilt files, in
particular files produced by bison, flex, perl, and well as html and
man documentation. We have done this consistent with established
practice at the time to not require these tools for building from a
tarball. Some of these tools were hard to get, or get the right
version of, from time to time, and shipping the prebuilt output was a
convenience to users.
Now this has at least two problems:
One, we have to make the build system(s) work in two modes: Building
from a git checkout and building from a tarball. This is pretty
complicated, but it works so far for autoconf/make. It does not
currently work for meson; you can currently only build with meson from
a git checkout. Making meson builds work from a tarball seems very
difficult or impossible. One particular problem is that since meson
requires a separate build directory, we cannot make the build update
files like gram.h in the source tree. So if you were to build from a
tarball and update gram.y, you will have a gram.h in the source tree
and one in the build tree, but the way things work is that the
compiler will always use the one in the source tree. So you cannot,
for example, make any gram.y changes when building from a tarball.
This seems impossible to fix in a non-horrible way.
Second, there is increased interest nowadays in precisely tracking the
origin of software. We can reasonably track contributions into the
git tree, and users can reasonably track the path from a tarball to
packages and downloads and installs. But what happens between the git
tree and the tarball is obscure and in some cases non-reproducible.
The solution for both of these issues is to get rid of the step that
adds prebuilt files to the tarball. The tarball now only contains
what is in the git tree (*). Getting the additional build
dependencies is no longer a problem nowadays, and the complications to
keep these dual build modes working are significant. And of course we
want to get the meson build system working universally.
This commit removes the make distprep target altogether. The make
dist target continues to do its job, it just doesn't call distprep
anymore.
(*) - The tarball also contains the INSTALL file that is built at make
dist time, but not by distprep. This is unchanged for now.
The make maintainer-clean target, whose job it is to remove the
prebuilt files in addition to what make distclean does, is now just an
alias to make distprep. (In practice, it is probably obsolete given
that git clean is available.)
The following programs are now hard build requirements in configure
(they were already required by meson.build):
- bison
- flex
- perl
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/e07408d9-e5f2-d9fd-5672-f53354e9305e@eisentraut.org
This function implements the standard XMLTest function, which
converts text into xml text nodes. It uses the libxml2 function
xmlEncodeSpecialChars to escape predefined entities (&"<>), so
that those do not cause any conflict when concatenating the text
node output with existing xml documents.
This also adds a note in features.sgml about not supporting
XML(SEQUENCE). The SQL specification defines a RETURNING clause
to a set of XML functions, where RETURNING CONTENT or RETURNING
SEQUENCE can be defined. Since PostgreSQL doesn't support
XML(SEQUENCE) all of these functions operate with an
implicit RETURNING CONTENT.
Author: Jim Jones <jim.jones@uni-muenster.de>
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/86617a66-ec95-581f-8d54-08059cca8885@uni-muenster.de
In f13eb16485 I made a mistake leading to only man1 being installed. I will
report a bug suggesting that meson warn about mistakes of this sort.
Reported-by: Christoph Berg <myon@debian.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZUU5pRQO6ZUeBsi6@msg.df7cb.de
Backpatch: 16-, where the meson build was introduced
This text left one with the impression that an ON SELECT rule could
be attached to a plain table, which has not been true since commit
264c06820 (meaning the text was already misleading when written,
evidently by me in 96bd67f61). However, it didn't get really bad
until b23cd185f removed the convert-a-table-to-a-view logic, which
had made it possible for scripts that thought they were attaching
ON SELECTs to tables to still work.
Rewrite into a form that makes it clear that an ON SELECT rule
is better regarded as an implementation detail of a view.
Pre-v16, point out that adding ON SELECT to a table actually
converts it to a view.
Per bug #18178 from Joshua Uyehara. Back-patch to all supported
branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18178-05534d7064044d2d@postgresql.org
Introduce unicode_version(), icu_unicode_version(), and
unicode_assigned().
The latter requires introducing a new lookup table for the Unicode
General Category, which is generated along with the other Unicode
lookup tables.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYzYR-yhU6k1XFCADeyj=Oyz2PkVsa3iKv+keM8wp-F_A@mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
This part of the documentation refers to exceptions as handled by
PL/pgSQL, and using the internal error code is confusing.
Per thinko in 66bde49d96.
Reported-by: Euler Taveira, Bruce Momjian
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZUEUnLevXyW7DlCs@momjian.us
Backpatch-through: 11
The documentation includes a section describing how to define custom
LWLocks in extensions using the shmem hooks. However, it has never
mentioned the second, more flexible method based on the following
routines:
- LWLockNewTrancheId() to allocate a tranche ID.
- LWLockRegisterTranche() to associate a name to a tranche ID.
- LWLockInitialize() to initialize a LWLock with a tranche ID.
autoprewarm.c is the only example of extension in the tree that
allocates a LWLock this way.
This commit adds some documentation about all that. While on it, a
comment is added about the need of AddinShmemInitLock. This is required
especially for EXEC_BACKEND builds (aka Windows, normally), as per a
remark from Alexander, because backends can execute shmem initialization
paths concurrently.
Author: Aleksander Alekseev, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TPKhFgL+54cdTD9yGpG4+sNcyJ+N1GvQqAxgWENAOa3VA@mail.gmail.com
Commit 536f410111 added links in the ALTER SUBSCRIPTION command page. The
link names used were slightly different from what other logical
replication commands like CREATE SUBSCRIPTION/PUBLICATION have but were
consistent with other docs. This patch changes the link names for all the
parameters to have 'params' word in the CREATE SUBSCRIPTION/PUBLICATION
pages.
Author: Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAHut%2BPu2S4RdzYKR7H5_E7QYWyq5hB0hL4EFrYbP91Qso62jeg%40mail.gmail.com
Historically, the statistics of the checkpointer have been always part
of pg_stat_bgwriter. This commit removes a few columns from
pg_stat_bgwriter, and introduces pg_stat_checkpointer with equivalent,
renamed columns (plus a new one for the reset timestamp):
- checkpoints_timed -> num_timed
- checkpoints_req -> num_requested
- checkpoint_write_time -> write_time
- checkpoint_sync_time -> sync_time
- buffers_checkpoint -> buffers_written
The fields of PgStat_CheckpointerStats and its SQL functions are renamed
to match with the new field names, for consistency. Note that
background writer and checkpointer have been split into two different
processes in commits 806a2aee37 and bf405ba8e4. The pgstat
structures were already split, making this change straight-forward.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Andres Freund, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACVxX2ii=66RypXRweZe2EsBRiPMj0aHfRfHUeXJcC7kHg@mail.gmail.com
It is best not to mention the storage order, because that is
an implementation detail and has confused at least one user,
who assumed that the storage order is the order in which the
constituent ranges were written in SQL.
Since the sorting order is explained at the beginning of the
page, it should be sufficient to say that the ranges are
returned in ascending order.
Author: Laurenz Albe
Reviewed-by: Daniel Fredouille
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/169627213477.3727338.17653654241633692682%40wrigleys.postgresql.org
Add the 'checkunique' argument to bt_index_check() and bt_index_parent_check().
When the flag is specified the procedures will check the unique constraint
violation for unique indexes. Only one heap entry for all equal keys in
the index should be visible (including posting list entries). Report an error
otherwise.
pg_amcheck called with the --checkunique option will do the same check for all
the indexes it checks.
Author: Anastasia Lubennikova <lubennikovaav@gmail.com>
Author: Pavel Borisov <pashkin.elfe@gmail.com>
Author: Maxim Orlov <orlovmg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Mark Dilger <mark.dilger@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALT9ZEHRn5xAM5boga0qnrCmPV52bScEK2QnQ1HmUZDD301JEg%40mail.gmail.com
Two attributes related to checkpointer statistics are removed in this
commit:
- buffers_backend, that counts the number of buffers written directly by
a backend.
- buffers_backend_fsync, that counts the number of times a backend had
to do fsync() by its own.
These are actually not checkpointer properties but backend properties.
Also, pg_stat_io provides a more accurate and equivalent report of these
numbers, by tracking all the I/O stats related to backends, including
writes and fsyncs, so storing them in pg_stat_checkpointer was
redundant.
Thanks also to Robert Haas and Amit Kapila for their input.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230210004604.mcszbscsqs3bc5nx@awork3.anarazel.de
While reading information from the old cluster, a list of logical
slots is fetched. At the later part of upgrading, pg_upgrade revisits the
list and restores slots by executing pg_create_logical_replication_slot()
on the new cluster. Migration of logical replication slots is only
supported when the old cluster is version 17.0 or later.
If the old node has invalid slots or slots with unconsumed WAL records,
the pg_upgrade fails. These checks are needed to prevent data loss.
The significant advantage of this commit is that it makes it easy to
continue logical replication even after upgrading the publisher node.
Previously, pg_upgrade allowed copying publications to a new node. With
this patch, adjusting the connection string to the new publisher will
cause the apply worker on the subscriber to connect to the new publisher
automatically. This enables seamless continuation of logical replication,
even after an upgrade.
Author: Hayato Kuroda, Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Bharath Rupireddy, Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Shlok Kyal
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB58664C81887B3AF2EB6B16E3F5939@TYAPR01MB5866.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+t7xYcfa0rEQw839=b2MzsfvYDPz3xbD+ZqOdP3zpKYg@mail.gmail.com
As far as I can see, ecpg has no notion of a "default" open
connection. You can do "CONNECT TO DEFAULT" but that just specifies
letting libpq use all its default connection parameters --- the
resulting connection is not special subsequently. In particular,
SET CONNECTION = DEFAULT and DISCONNECT DEFAULT simply act on a
connection named DEFAULT, if you've made one; they do not have
special lookup rules. But the documentation of these commands
makes it look like they do.
Simplest fix, I think, is just to remove the paras suggesting that
DEFAULT is special here.
Also, SET CONNECTION *does* have one special lookup rule, which
is that it recognizes CURRENT as an alias for the currently selected
connection. SET CONNECTION = CURRENT is a no-op, so it's pretty
useless, but nonetheless it does something different from selecting
a connection by name; so we'd better document it.
Per report from Sylvain Frandaz. Back-patch to all supported
versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/169824721149.1769274.1553568436817652238@wrigleys.postgresql.org
The Self Join Elimination (SJE) feature removes an inner join of a plain table
to itself in the query tree if is proved that the join can be replaced with
a scan without impacting the query result. Self join and inner relation are
replaced with the outer in query, equivalence classes, and planner info
structures. Also, inner restrictlist moves to the outer one with removing
duplicated clauses. Thus, this optimization reduces the length of the range
table list (this especially makes sense for partitioned relations), reduces
the number of restriction clauses === selectivity estimations, and potentially
can improve total planner prediction for the query.
The SJE proof is based on innerrel_is_unique machinery.
We can remove a self-join when for each outer row:
1. At most one inner row matches the join clause.
2. Each matched inner row must be (physically) the same row as the outer one.
In this patch we use the next approach to identify a self-join:
1. Collect all merge-joinable join quals which look like a.x = b.x
2. Add to the list above the baseretrictinfo of the inner table.
3. Check innerrel_is_unique() for the qual list. If it returns false, skip
this pair of joining tables.
4. Check uniqueness, proved by the baserestrictinfo clauses. To prove
the possibility of self-join elimination inner and outer clauses must have
an exact match.
The relation replacement procedure is not trivial and it is partly combined
with the one, used to remove useless left joins. Tests, covering this feature,
were added to join.sql. Some regression tests changed due to self-join removal
logic.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/64486b0b-0404-e39e-322d-0801154901f3%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Andrey Lepikhov, Alexander Kuzmenkov
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Robert Haas, Andres Freund, Simon Riggs, Jonathan S. Katz
Reviewed-by: David Rowley, Thomas Munro, Konstantin Knizhnik, Heikki Linnakangas
Reviewed-by: Hywel Carver, Laurenz Albe, Ronan Dunklau, vignesh C, Zhihong Yu
Reviewed-by: Greg Stark, Jaime Casanova, Michał Kłeczek, Alena Rybakina
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov
Rather than using the generic word "space" we might as well use "memory"
since that's precisely what we're dealing with here.
This was extracted from a larger patch around terminology changes where
the remaining hunks were rejected.
Author: Gurjeet Singh <gurjeet@singh.im>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABwTF4UHO_NtcsOL6_XZfnpKg_0XBFKa7B-7_x5zs3MRZm3-Tg@mail.gmail.com
Clearly spell out the limitations of aminsert()'s indexUnchanged hinting
mechanism in the index AM documentation.
Oversight in commit 9dc718bd, which added the "logically unchanged
index" hint (which is used to trigger bottom-up index deletion).
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reported-By: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-By: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzmU_BQ=-H9L+bxTSMQBqHMjp1DSwGypvL0gKs+dTOfkKg@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 14-, where indexUnchanged hinting was introduced.
This doco said that use of => as an operator "is deprecated".
It's been fully disallowed since 865f14a2d back in 9.5, but
evidently that commit missed updating this statement.
Do so now.
Allow the COMMUTATOR, NEGATOR, MERGES, and HASHES attributes to be set
by ALTER OPERATOR. However, we don't allow COMMUTATOR/NEGATOR to be
changed once set, nor allow the MERGES/HASHES flags to be unset once
set. Changes like that might invalidate plans already made, and
dealing with the consequences seems like more trouble than it's worth.
The main use-case we foresee for this is to allow addition of missed
properties in extension update scripts, such as extending an existing
operator to support hashing. So only transitions from not-set to set
states seem very useful.
This patch also causes us to reject some incorrect cases that formerly
resulted in inconsistent catalog state, such as trying to set the
commutator of an operator to be some other operator that already has a
(different) commutator.
While at it, move the InvokeObjectPostCreateHook call for CREATE
OPERATOR to not occur until after we've fixed up commutator or negator
links as needed. The previous ordering could only be justified by
thinking of the OperatorUpd call as a kind of ALTER OPERATOR step;
but we don't call InvokeObjectPostAlterHook therein. It seems better
to let the hook see the final state of the operator object.
In the documentation, move the discussion of how to establish
commutator pairs from xoper.sgml to the CREATE OPERATOR ref page.
Tommy Pavlicek, reviewed and editorialized a bit by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEhP-W-vGVzf4udhR5M8Bdv88UYnPrhoSkj3ieR3QNrsGQoqdg@mail.gmail.com
This commit adds to pg_stat_statements the two new fields for local
buffers introduced by 295c36c0c1, adding the time spent to read and
write these blocks. These are similar to what is done for temp and
shared blocks. This information available only if track_io_timing is
enabled.
Like for 5a3423ad8e, no version bump is required in the module.
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ19Ss279mZuqGbuUNxka0iPbLgYuOQXqAKewrjNrp27VA@mail.gmail.com
There was no I/O timing statistics for counting read and write timings
on local blocks, contrary to the counterparts for temp and shared
blocks. This information is available when track_io_timing is enabled.
The output of EXPLAIN is updated to show this information. An update of
pg_stat_statements is planned next.
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ19Ss279mZuqGbuUNxka0iPbLgYuOQXqAKewrjNrp27VA@mail.gmail.com
These two counters, defined in BufferUsage to track respectively the
time spent while reading and writing blocks have historically only
tracked data related to shared buffers, when track_io_timing is enabled.
An upcoming patch to add specific counters for local buffers will take
advantage of this rename as it has come up that no data is currently
tracked for local buffers, and tracking local and shared buffers using
the same fields would be inconsistent with the treatment done for temp
buffers. Renaming the existing fields clarifies what the block type of
each stats field is.
pg_stat_statement is updated to reflect the rename. No extension
version bump is required as 5a3423ad8e has done one, affecting v17~.
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ19Ss279mZuqGbuUNxka0iPbLgYuOQXqAKewrjNrp27VA@mail.gmail.com
Since its introduction, LogLogicalMessage() (via the SQL interface
pg_logical_emit_message()) has never included a call to XLogFlush(),
causing it to potentially lose messages on a crash when used in
non-transactional mode. This has come up to me as a problem while
playing with ideas to design a test suite for what has become
039_end_of_wal.pl introduced in bae868caf2 by Thomas Munro, because
there are no direct ways to force a WAL flush via SQL.
The default is false, to not flush messages and influence existing
use-cases where this function could be used. If set to true, the
message emitted is flushed before returning back to the caller, making
the message durable on crash. This new option has no effect when using
pg_logical_emit_message() in transactional mode, as the record's flush
is guaranteed by the WAL record generated by the transaction committed.
Two queries of test_decoding are tweaked to cover the new code path for
the flush.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Amit Kapila, Fujii Masao, Tung Nguyen, Tomas
Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZNsdThSe2qgsfs7R@paquier.xyz
First, we shouldn't recommend switching to single-user mode, because
that's terrible advice. Especially on newer versions where VACUUM
will enter emergency mode when nearing (M)XID exhaustion, it's
perfectly fine to just VACUUM in multi-user mode. Doing it that way
is less disruptive and avoids disabling the safeguards that prevent
actual wraparound, so recommend that instead.
Second, be more precise about what is going to happen (when we're
nearing the limits) or what is happening (when we actually hit them).
The database doesn't shut down, nor does it refuse all commands. It
refuses commands that assign whichever of XIDs and MXIDs are nearly
exhausted.
No back-patch. The existing hint that advises going to single-user
mode is sufficiently awful advice that removing it or changing it
might be justifiable even though we normally avoid changing
user-facing messages in back-branches, but I (rhaas) felt that it
was better to be more conservative and limit this fix to master
only. Aside from the usual risk of breaking translations, people
might be used to the existing message, or even have monitoring
scripts that look for it.
Alexander Alekseev, John Naylor, Robert Haas, reviewed at various
times by Peter Geoghegan, Hannu Krosing, and Andres Freund.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZBg95FiR9wVQPAXpGPRkacSt2okVge+PKPPFppN7sfnQ@mail.gmail.com
The old documentation encourages entering single-user mode for no
reason, which is a bad plan in most cases. Instead, discourage users
from doing that, and explain the limited cases in which it may be
desirable.
The old documentation claims that running VACUUM as anyone but the
superuser can't possibly work, which is not really true, because it
might be that some other user has enough permissions to VACUUM all
the tables that matter. Weaken the language just a bit.
The old documentation claims that you can't run any commands
when near XID exhaustion, which is false because you can still
run commands that don't require an XID, like a SELECT without a
locking clause.
The old documentation doesn't clearly explain that it's a good idea
to get rid of prepared transactons, long-running transactions, and
replication slots that are preventing (M)XID horizon advancement.
Spell out the steps to do that.
Also, discourage the use of VACUUM FULL and VACUUM FREEZE in
this type of scenario.
Back-patch to v14. Much of this is good advice on all supported
versions, but before 60f1f09ff4
the chances of VACUUM failing in multi-user mode were much higher.
Alexander Alekseev, John Naylor, Robert Haas, reviewed at various
times by Peter Geoghegan, Hannu Krosing, and Andres Freund.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYtsUDrzaHcmjFhLzTk1VEv29mO_u-MT+XWHrBJ_4nD8A@mail.gmail.com
This commit introduces trigger on login event, allowing to fire some actions
right on the user connection. This can be useful for logging or connection
check purposes as well as for some personalization of environment. Usage
details are described in the documentation included, but shortly usage is
the same as for other triggers: create function returning event_trigger and
then create event trigger on login event.
In order to prevent the connection time overhead when there are no triggers
the commit introduces pg_database.dathasloginevt flag, which indicates database
has active login triggers. This flag is set by CREATE/ALTER EVENT TRIGGER
command, and unset at connection time when no active triggers found.
Author: Konstantin Knizhnik, Mikhail Gribkov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0d46d29f-4558-3af9-9c85-7774e14a7709%40postgrespro.ru
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule, Takayuki Tsunakawa, Greg Nancarrow, Ivan Panchenko
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson, Teodor Sigaev, Robert Haas, Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Andrey Sokolov, Zhihong Yu, Sergey Shinderuk
Reviewed-by: Gregory Stark, Nikita Malakhov, Ted Yu
When converting a timestamp to/from with/without time zone, the SQL
Standard specifies an AT LOCAL variant of AT TIME ZONE which uses the
session's time zone. This includes three system functions able to do
the work in the same way as the existing flavors for AT TIME ZONE,
except that these need to be marked as stable as they depend on the
session's TimeZone GUC.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Vik Fearing
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe, Cary Huang, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8e25dec4-5667-c1a5-6581-167d710c2182@postgresfriends.org
timezone(zone, timestamp) is already mentioned as an equivalent of the
two first patterns in the table describing the AT TIME ZONE variants,
but did not mention the third case about "time" and its equivalent as an
SQL function, so let's be consistent here.
Extracted from a larger patch by the same author.
Author: Vik Fearing
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8e25dec4-5667-c1a5-6581-167d710c2182@postgresfriends.org
This adds a new option called BGWORKER_BYPASS_ROLELOGINCHECK to the
flags available to BackgroundWorkerInitializeConnection() and
BackgroundWorkerInitializeConnectionByOid().
This gives the possibility to bgworkers to bypass the role login check,
making possible the use of a role that has no login rights while not
being a superuser. PostgresInit() gains a new flag called
INIT_PG_OVERRIDE_ROLE_LOGIN, taking advantage of the refactoring done in
4800a5dfb4.
Regression tests are added to worker_spi to check the behavior of this
new option with bgworkers.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Michael Paquier, Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bcc36259-7850-4882-97ef-d6b905d2fc51@gmail.com
While these two built-in functions do exactly the same thing,
CURRENT_USER seems preferable to use in documentation examples.
It's easier to look up if the reader is unsure what it is.
Also, this puts these examples in sync with an adjacent example
that already used CURRENT_USER.
Per question from Kirk Parker.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANwZ8rmN_Eb0h0hoMRS8Feftaik0z89PxVsKg+cP+PctuOq=Qg@mail.gmail.com
Two custom wait events are added here:
- "DblinkConnect", when waiting to establish a connection to a remote
server.
- "DblinkGetConnect", when waiting to establish a connection to a remote
server but it could not be found in the list of already-opened ones.
Author: Masahiro Ikeda
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/197bce267fa691a0ac62c86c4ab904c4@oss.nttdata.com
Three custom wait events are added here:
- "PostgresFdwCleanupResult", waiting while cleaning up PQgetResult() on
transaction abort.
- "PostgresFdwConnect", waiting to establish a connection to a remote
server.
- "PostgresFdwGetResult", waiting to receive a result from a remote
server.
Author: Masahiro Ikeda
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/197bce267fa691a0ac62c86c4ab904c4@oss.nttdata.com
This naming is more consistent with all the other user-facing wait event
strings. Other in-core modules will use the same naming convention, so
let's be consistent here as well.
Extracted from a larger patch by the same author.
Author: Masahiro Ikeda
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/197bce267fa691a0ac62c86c4ab904c4@oss.nttdata.com
Allow a line break in example output, as we have done elsewhere.
Overlength output was added in commit 1e68e43d3.
While here, adjust some shaky grammar in an adjacent note
(from a different commit, c9af05465).
Per buildfarm.
These options already exist, but you need to specify a column list for
them, which can be cumbersome. We already have the possibility of all
columns for FORCE QUOTE, so this is simply extending that facility to
FORCE_NULL and FORCE_NOT_NULL.
Author: Zhang Mingli
Reviewed-By: Richard Guo, Kyatoro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxEnVqzOFtqhexF2+AwOKFrV8zHOY3y=p+gPK6eB14pn_w@mail.gmail.com
Commit 7d3b7011b added a link to the statistics functions, which at the
time were anchored under the section for statistics views. aebe989477
added a separate section for statistics functions, but the link was not
updated to point to the new anchor. Fix by changing the xref.
Backpatch to all supported branches.
Author: Peter Smith <peter.b.smith@fujitsu.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+Ptr0jKzNNtWnssLq+3jNhbyaBseqf6NPrWHk08mQFRoTg@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 11
For a reader unfamiliar with the postgres code it might take some
grepping to find where elevels are defined. This adds a reference
to elog.h in the text like how SQLSTATE errorcodes are referenced
to errcodes.h on the same page.
Author: Kuwamura Masaki <kuwamura@db.is.i.nagoya-u.ac.jp>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMyC8qqp1UDA9zothnJ9CbUYByytwpALS3LkdZ6bs1w5kZw5Xg@mail.gmail.com
Thanks to commit 2a8b40e368, the logical replication worker type is
easily determined. The worker type could already be deduced via
other columns such as leader_pid and relid, but that is unnecessary
complexity for users.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Maxim Orlov, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut%2BPtmbSMfErSk0S7xxVdZJ9XVE3xVLhqBTmT91kf57BeKDQ%40mail.gmail.com
Without the added "relation" it's not immediately clear that the option
relates to the relation segment size and not e.g. the WAL segment size.
The option was added in d3b111e32.
Reported-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/837536.1695348498@sss.pgh.pa.us
Backpatch: 16-
In order to troubleshoot misbehaving or buggy event triggers, the
documented advice is to enter single-user mode. In an attempt to
reduce the number of situations where single-user mode is required
(or even recommended) for non-extraordinary maintenance, this GUC
allows to temporarily suspend event triggers.
This was originally extracted from a larger patchset which aimed
at supporting event triggers on login events.
Reviewed-by: Ted Yu <yuzhihong@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Mikhail Gribkov <youzhick@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9140106E-F9BF-4D85-8FC8-F2D3C094A6D9@yesql.se
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0d46d29f-4558-3af9-9c85-7774e14a7709@postgrespro.ru
The previous wording had a faint archaic whiff to it, and more
importantly used "catalogs" as a verb, which while cutely
self-referential seems likely to provoke confusion in this
particular context. Also consistently use "kind" not "type" to
refer to the different kinds of relations distinguished by relkind.
Per gripe from Martin Nash. Back-patch to supported versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/169518739902.3727338.4793815593763320945@wrigleys.postgresql.org
As physical replication work at the cluster level and not database
level, any dbname in the connection string is ignored. Proxies and
middleware used in connecting to the cluster might however need to
know the dbname in order to make the correct routing decision for
the connection.
With this the startup packet will include the dbname parameter.
Author: Jelte Fennema-Nio <me@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Tristen Raab <tristen.raab@highgo.ca>
Reviewed-by: Jim Jones <jim.jones@uni-muenster.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQTw-dZkVT_RELRzfWRzY714-VaTjoBATYfZq93R8C-auA@mail.gmail.com
As reported in bug #18057, the extension unaccent removes in its rule
file whitespace characters that are intentionally specified when
building unaccent.rules from UnicodeData.txt, causing an incorrect
translation for some characters like numeric symbols. This is caused by
the fact that all whitespaces before and after the origin and target
characters are all discarded (this limitation is documented).
This commit makes possible the use of quotes around target characters,
so as whitespaces can be considered part of target characters. Some
target characters use a double quote, these require an extra double
quote.
The documentation is updated to show how to use quoted areas,
generate_unaccent_rules.py is updated to generate unaccent.rules and a
couple of tests are added for numeric symbols. While working on this
patch, I have implemented a fake rule file to test the parsing logic
implemented, which is not included here as it would just consume extra
cycles in the tests, and it requires the manipulation of an installation
tree to be able to work correctly.
As this requires a change of format in unaccent.rules, this cannot be
backpatched, unfortunately. The idea to use double quotes as escaped
characters comes from Tom Lane.
Reported-by: Martin Schlossarek
Author: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18057-62712cad01bd202c@postgresql.org
cursor_to_xmlschema() assumed that any Portal must have a tupDesc,
which is not so. Add a defensive check.
It's plausible that this mistake occurred because of the rather
poorly chosen name of the lookup function SPI_cursor_find(),
which in such cases is returning something that isn't very much
like a cursor. Add some documentation to try to forestall future
errors of the same ilk.
Report and patch by Boyu Yang (docs changes by me). Back-patch
to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/dd343010-c637-434c-a8cb-418f53bda3b8.yangboyu.yby@alibaba-inc.com
The documentation is pretty light on how to set column options
on foreign tables, and the file_fdw docs refer to COPY when
documenting force_null even though it's not used in the same
way. Add a small example to describe how to use it.
Reported-by: Boshomi Phenix <boshomi@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJVkCUparn4_Oarernm=U6LWVsTkecKcALHtwGr5M3qJRj_czw@mail.gmail.com
generation_counter includes time spent on both JIT:ing expressions
and tuple deforming which are configured independently via options
jit_expressions and jit_tuple_deforming. As they are combined in
the same counter it's not apparent what fraction of time the tuple
deforming takes.
This adds deform_counter dedicated to tuple deforming, which allows
seeing more directly the influence jit_tuple_deforming is having on
the query. The counter is exposed in EXPLAIN and pg_stat_statements
bumpin pg_stat_statements to 1.11.
Author: Dmitry Dolgov <9erthalion6@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220612091253.eegstkufdsu4kfls@erthalion.local
Extend the PG_TEST_EXTRA documentation to mention resource intensive
tests as well. The previous wording only mentioned special software
and security in the main paragraph, with resource usage listed on one
of the tests in the list.
Backpatch to v15 where f47ed79cc8 added wal_consistenct_checking as
a PG_TEST_EXTRA target.
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ0OthTuBdiNkaX2BvxuHdK4Y1MVEb8_uEuD1yHMPmT9Og@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 15
This commit allows specifying a --sync-method in several frontend
utilities that must synchronize many files to disk (initdb,
pg_basebackup, pg_checksums, pg_dump, pg_rewind, and pg_upgrade).
On Linux, users can specify "syncfs" to synchronize the relevant
file systems instead of calling fsync() for every single file. In
many cases, using syncfs() is much faster.
As with recovery_init_sync_method, this new option comes with some
caveats. The descriptions of these caveats have been moved to a
new appendix section in the documentation.
Co-authored-by: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Thomas Munro, Robert Haas, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210930004340.GM831%40telsasoft.com
Previously when client was aborted due to some error during
benchmarking, other clients continued their run until certain number
of transactions specified -t was reached or the time specified by -T
was expired. At the end, the results are printed with caution: "Run
was aborted; the above results are incomplete" shows.
New option "--exit-on-abort" allows pgbench to exit immediately in
this case so that users could quickly fix the cause of the failure and
try again another round of benchmarking.
Author: Yugo Nagata
Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO, Tatsuo Ishii
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/20230804130325.df32e60879c38c92bca64207%40sraoss.co.jp
The logical_replication_mode GUC is intended for testing and debugging
purposes, but its current name may be misleading and encourage users to make
unnecessary changes.
To avoid confusion, renaming the GUC to a less misleading name
debug_logical_replication_streaming that casual users are less likely to mistakenly
assume needs to be modified in a regular logical replication setup.
Author: Hou Zhijie <houzj.fnst@cn.fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d672d774-c44b-6fec-f993-793e744f169a%40eisentraut.org
When running a repeat query with \watch in psql, it can be
helpful to be able to stop the watch process when the query
no longer returns the expected amount of rows. An example
would be to watch for the presence of a certain event in
pg_stat_activity and stopping when the event is no longer
present, or to watch an index creation and stop when the
index is created.
This adds a min_rows=MIN parameter to \watch which can be
set to a non-negative integer, and the watch query will
stop executing when it returns less than MIN rows.
Author: Greg Sabino Mullane <htamfids@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKAnmmKStATuddYxP71L+p0DHtp9Rvjze3XRoy0Dyw67VQ45UA@mail.gmail.com
We now create contype='n' pg_constraint rows for not-null constraints.
We propagate these constraints to other tables during operations such as
adding inheritance relationships, creating and attaching partitions and
creating tables LIKE other tables. We also spawn not-null constraints
for inheritance child tables when their parents have primary keys.
These related constraints mostly follow the well-known rules of
conislocal and coninhcount that we have for CHECK constraints, with some
adaptations: for example, as opposed to CHECK constraints, we don't
match not-null ones by name when descending a hierarchy to alter it,
instead matching by column name that they apply to. This means we don't
require the constraint names to be identical across a hierarchy.
For now, we omit them for system catalogs. Maybe this is worth
reconsidering. We don't support NOT VALID nor DEFERRABLE clauses
either; these can be added as separate features later (this patch is
already large and complicated enough.)
psql shows these constraints in \d+.
pg_dump requires some ad-hoc hacks, particularly when dumping a primary
key. We now create one "throwaway" not-null constraint for each column
in the PK together with the CREATE TABLE command, and once the PK is
created, all those throwaway constraints are removed. This avoids
having to check each tuple for nullness when the dump restores the
primary key creation.
pg_upgrading from an older release requires a somewhat brittle procedure
to create a constraint state that matches what would be created if the
database were being created fresh in Postgres 17. I have tested all the
scenarios I could think of, and it works correctly as far as I can tell,
but I could have neglected weird cases.
This patch has been very long in the making. The first patch was
written by Bernd Helmle in 2010 to add a new pg_constraint.contype value
('n'), which I (Álvaro) then hijacked in 2011 and 2012, until that one
was killed by the realization that we ought to use contype='c' instead:
manufactured CHECK constraints. However, later SQL standard
development, as well as nonobvious emergent properties of that design
(mostly, failure to distinguish them from "normal" CHECK constraints as
well as the performance implication of having to test the CHECK
expression) led us to reconsider this choice, so now the current
implementation uses contype='n' again. During Postgres 16 this had
already been introduced by commit e056c557ae, but there were some
problems mainly with the pg_upgrade procedure that couldn't be fixed in
reasonable time, so it was reverted.
In 2016 Vitaly Burovoy also worked on this feature[1] but found no
consensus for his proposed approach, which was claimed to be closer to
the letter of the standard, requiring an additional pg_attribute column
to track the OID of the not-null constraint for that column.
[1] https://postgr.es/m/CAKOSWNkN6HSyatuys8xZxzRCR-KL1OkHS5-b9qd9bf1Rad3PLA@mail.gmail.com
Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
This commit introduces functions for converting numbers to their
equivalent binary and octal representations. Also, the base
conversion code for these functions and to_hex() has been moved to
a common helper function.
Co-authored-by: Eric Radman
Reviewed-by: Ian Barwick, Dag Lem, Vignesh C, Tom Lane, Peter Eisentraut, Kirk Wolak, Vik Fearing, John Naylor, Dean Rasheed
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y6IyTQQ/TsD5wnsH%40vm3.eradman.com
The list of external language drivers and procedural languages was
never complete or exhaustive, and rather than attempting to manage
it the content has migrated to the wiki. This replaces the tables
altogether with links to the wiki as we regularly get requests for
adding various projects, which we reject without any clear policy
for why or how the content should be managed.
The threads linked to below are the most recent discussions about
this, the archives contain many more.
Backpatch to all supported branches since the list on the wiki
applies to all branches.
Author: Jonathan Katz <jkatz@postgresql.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/169165415312.635.10247434927885764880@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/169177958824.635.11087800083040275266@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: v11
This new view, wrapped around a SRF, shows some information known about
wait events, as of:
- Name.
- Type (Activity, I/O, Extension, etc.).
- Description.
All the information retrieved comes from wait_event_names.txt, and the
description is the same as the documentation with filters applied to
remove any XML markups. This view is useful when joined with
pg_stat_activity to get the description of a wait event reported.
Custom wait events for extensions are included in the view.
Original idea by Yves Colin.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Masahiro Ikeda, Tom Lane, Michael
Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0e2ae164-dc89-03c3-cf7f-de86378053ac@gmail.com
The source code comment already said that the presence of the field
element_types.domain_default might be a bug in the standard, since it
never made sense there. Indeed, the field is gone in newer versions
of the standard. So just remove it.
This was disabled in commit 6f80a8d9c due to the lack of support for
handling of pseudoconstant quals assigned to replaced joins in
createplan.c. To re-allow it, this patch adds the support by 1)
modifying the ForeignPath and CustomPath structs so that if they
represent foreign and custom scans replacing a join with a scan, they
store the list of RestrictInfo nodes to apply to the join, as in
JoinPaths, and by 2) modifying create_scan_plan() in createplan.c so
that it uses that list in that case, instead of the baserestrictinfo
list, to get pseudoconstant quals assigned to the join, as mentioned in
the commit message for that commit.
Important item for the release notes: this is non-backwards-compatible
since it modifies the ForeignPath and CustomPath structs, as mentioned
above, and changes the argument lists for FDW helper functions
create_foreignscan_path(), create_foreign_join_path(), and
create_foreign_upper_path().
Richard Guo, with some additional changes by me, reviewed by Nishant
Sharma, Suraj Kharage, and Richard Guo.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADrsxdbcN1vejBaf8a%2BQhrZY5PXL-04mCd4GDu6qm6FigDZd6Q%40mail.gmail.com
Currently, the names of the custom wait event must be registered for
each backend, requiring all these to link to the shared memory area of
an extension, even if these are not loaded with
shared_preload_libraries.
This patch relaxes the constraints related to this infrastructure by
storing the wait events and their names in two dynamic hash tables in
shared memory. This has the advantage to simplify the registration of
custom wait events to a single routine call that returns an event ID
ready for consumption:
uint32 WaitEventExtensionNew(const char *wait_event_name);
The caller of this routine can then cache locally the ID returned, to be
used for pgstat_report_wait_start(), WaitLatch() or a similar routine.
The implementation uses two hash tables: one with a key based on the
event name to avoid duplicates and a second using the event ID as key
for event lookups, like on pg_stat_activity. These tables can hold a
minimum of 16 entries, and a maximum of 128 entries, which should be plenty
enough.
The code changes done in worker_spi show how things are simplified (most
of the code removed in this commit comes from there):
- worker_spi_init() is gone.
- No more shared memory hooks required (size requested and
initialization).
- The custom wait event ID is cached in the process that needs to set
it, with one single call to WaitEventExtensionNew() to retrieve it.
Per suggestion from Andres Freund.
Author: Masahiro Ikeda, with a few tweaks from me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230801032349.aaiuvhtrcvvcwzcx@awork3.anarazel.de
Two backend routines are added to allow extension to allocate and define
custom wait events, all of these being allocated in the type
"Extension":
* WaitEventExtensionNew(), that allocates a wait event ID computed from
a counter in shared memory.
* WaitEventExtensionRegisterName(), to associate a custom string to the
wait event ID allocated.
Note that this includes an example of how to use this new facility in
worker_spi with tests in TAP for various scenarios, and some
documentation about how to use them.
Any code in the tree that currently uses WAIT_EVENT_EXTENSION could
switch to this new facility to define custom wait events. This is left
as work for future patches.
Author: Masahiro Ikeda
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Michael Paquier, Tristan Partin, Bharath
Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b9f5411acda0cf15c8fbb767702ff43e@oss.nttdata.com
Commits 83dec5a712 and ff402ae11b taught vacuumdb to reuse
passwords instead of prompting repeatedly. However, the docs still
warn about repeated prompts, and this improvement was not applied
to clusterdb and reindexdb. This commit allows clusterdb and
reindexdb to reuse passwords just like vacuumdb does, and it
expunges the aforementioned warnings from the docs.
Reviewed-by: Gurjeet Singh, Zhang Mingli
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230628045741.GA1813397%40nathanxps13
This Patch introduces three SQL standard JSON functions:
JSON()
JSON_SCALAR()
JSON_SERIALIZE()
JSON() produces json values from text, bytea, json or jsonb values,
and has facilitites for handling duplicate keys.
JSON_SCALAR() produces a json value from any scalar sql value,
including json and jsonb.
JSON_SERIALIZE() produces text or bytea from input which containis
or represents json or jsonb;
For the most part these functions don't add any significant new
capabilities, but they will be of use to users wanting standard
compliant JSON handling.
Catversion bumped as this changes ruleutils.c.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby, Álvaro Herrera,
Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
This commit switches the client-side data generation from INSERT queries
to COPY for the two tables pgbench_branches and pgbench_tellers.
pgbench_accounts was already using COPY.
COPY is a better interface for bulk loading or high latency connections
(this point can be countered with the option for server-side data
generation, still client-side is the default), and measurements have
proved that using it for these two other tables can lead to improvements
during initialization. I did not notice slowdowns at large scale
numbers on a local setup, either, most of the work happening for the
accounts table.
Previously COPY was only used for the pgbench_accounts table because the
amount of data was much larger than the two other tables. The code is
refactored so as all three tables use the same code path to execute the
COPY queries, with a callback to build data rows.
Author: Tristan Partin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CSTU5P82ONZ1.19XFUGHMXHBRY@c3po
This adds the X509 attributes notBefore and notAfter to sslinfo
as well as pg_stat_ssl to allow verifying and identifying the
validity period of the current client certificate.
Author: Cary Huang <cary.huang@highgo.ca>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/182b8565486.10af1a86f158715.2387262617218380588@highgo.ca
b5913f6120 added a parenthesized syntax for CLUSTER, but it
requires specifying a table name. This is unlike commands such as
VACUUM and ANALYZE, which do not require specifying a table in the
parenthesized syntax. This change resolves this inconsistency.
This is preparatory work for a follow-up commit that will move the
unparenthesized syntax to the "Compatibility" section of the
CLUSTER documentation.
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_bc5uHieG1976kGqJKxyWtyQt9yvktjsVX%2Bi7NOigDjOA%40mail.gmail.com
This change moves the unparenthesized syntax for CLUSTER to the end
of the ClusterStmt rules in preparation for a follow-up commit that
will move this syntax to the "Compatibility" section of the CLUSTER
documentation. The documentation for the CLUSTER syntaxes has also
been consolidated.
Suggested-by: Melanie Plageman
Discussion https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_bc5uHieG1976kGqJKxyWtyQt9yvktjsVX%2Bi7NOigDjOA%40mail.gmail.com
With the addition of INHERIT and SET options for role grants,
the historical display of role memberships in \du/\dg is woefully
inadequate. Besides those options, there are pre-existing
shortcomings that you can't see the ADMIN option nor the grantor.
To fix this, remove the "Member of" column from \du/\dg altogether
(making that output usefully narrower), and invent a new meta-command
"\drg" that is specifically for displaying role memberships. It
shows one row for each role granted to the selected role(s), with
the grant options and grantor.
We would not normally back-patch such a feature addition post
feature freeze, but in this case the change is mainly driven by
v16 changes in the server, so it seems appropriate to include it
in v16.
Pavel Luzanov, with bikeshedding and review from a lot of people,
but particularly David Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b9be2d0e-a9bc-0a30-492f-a4f68e4f7740@postgrespro.ru
IN and NOT IN work fine on records and arrays, so just say that
they accept "expressions" not "scalar expressions". I think that
that phrasing was meant to say that they don't work on set-returning
expressions, but that's not the common meaning of "scalar".
Revise the description of row-constructor comparisons to make it
perhaps a bit less confusing. (This partially reverts some
dubious wording changes made by commit f56651519.)
Per gripe from Ilya Nenashev. Back-patch to supported branches.
In HEAD and v16, also drop a NOTE about pre-8.2 behavior, which
is hopefully no longer of interest to anybody.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/168968062460.632.14303906825812821399@wrigleys.postgresql.org
By default, pg_archivecleanup does not remove backup history files.
These are just few bytes useful for debugging purposes, still keeping
them around can bloat an archive path history files mixed with the WAL
segments if the path has a long history.
This patch adds a new option to control if backup history files are
removed, depending on the oldest segment name to keep around.
While on it, the TAP tests are refactored so as these are now able to
handle lists of files. Each file has a flag to track if it should still
exist or not depending on the oldest segment defined with the command
run.
Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Fujii Masao, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d660ef741ce3d82f3b4283f1cafd576c@oss.nttdata.com
The "count" argument of SPI_exec() only limits execution when
the query is actually returning rows. This was not the case
before PG 9.0, so this example was correct when written; but
we missed updating it in commit 2ddc600f8. Extend the example
to show the behavior both with and without RETURNING.
While here, improve the commentary and markup for the rest
of the example.
David G. Johnston and Tom Lane, per report from Curt Kolovson.
Back-patch to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANhYJV6HWtgz_qjx_APfK0PAgLUzY-2vjLuj7i_o=TZF1LAQew@mail.gmail.com
Presently, the privilege check for SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION checks
whether the original authenticated role was a superuser at
connection start time. Even if the role loses the superuser
attribute, its existing sessions are permitted to change session
authorization to any role.
This commit modifies this privilege check to verify the original
authenticated role currently has superuser. In the event that the
authenticated role loses superuser within a session authorization
change, the authorization change will remain in effect, which means
the user can still take advantage of the target role's privileges.
However, [RE]SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION will only permit switching
to the original authenticated role.
Author: Joseph Koshakow
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAvxfHc-HHzONQ2oXdvhFF9ayRnidPwK%2BfVBhRzaBWYYLVQL-g%40mail.gmail.com
Commit 89e46da5e5 allowed using BTREE indexes that are neither
PRIMARY KEY nor REPLICA IDENTITY on the subscriber during apply of
update/delete. This patch extends that functionality to also allow HASH
indexes.
We explored supporting other index access methods as well but they don't
have a fixed strategy for equality operation which is required by the
current infrastructure in logical replication to scan the indexes.
Author: Kuroda Hayato
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Onder Kalaci, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB58669D7414E59664E17A5827F522A@TYAPR01MB5866.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
The "fsync" level already flushes drive write caches on Windows (as does
"fdatasync"), so it only confuses matters to have an apparently higher
level that isn't actually different at all.
That leaves "fsync_writethrough" only for macOS, where it actually does
something different.
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander <magnus@hagander.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJ2CG2SouPv2mca2WCTOJxYumvBARRcKPraFMB6GSEMcA%40mail.gmail.com
Until now, when DROP DATABASE got interrupted in the wrong moment, the removal
of the pg_database row would also roll back, even though some irreversible
steps have already been taken. E.g. DropDatabaseBuffers() might have thrown
out dirty buffers, or files could have been unlinked. But we continued to
allow connections to such a corrupted database.
To fix this, mark databases invalid with an in-place update, just before
starting to perform irreversible steps. As we can't add a new column in the
back branches, we use pg_database.datconnlimit = -2 for this purpose.
An invalid database cannot be connected to anymore, but can still be
dropped.
Unfortunately we can't easily add output to psql's \l to indicate that some
database is invalid, it doesn't fit in any of the existing columns.
Add tests verifying that a interrupted DROP DATABASE is handled correctly in
the backend and in various tools.
Reported-by: Evgeny Morozov <postgresql3@realityexists.net>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230509004637.cgvmfwrbht7xm7p6@awork3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230314174521.74jl6ffqsee5mtug@awork3.anarazel.de
Backpatch: 11-, bug present in all supported versions
Commit 89e46da5e allowed REPLICA IDENTITY FULL tables to use an index
on the subscriber during apply of update/delete. This commit clarifies
in the documentation that the leftmost field of candidate indexes must
be a column (not an expression) that references the published relation
column.
The source code comments are also updated accordingly.
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDJjffEvUFKXT27Q5U8-UU9JHv4rrJ9Ke8Zkc5UPWHLvA@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 16
The errhint example wasn't using the mandated style for errhint
which was needlessly confusing. Fix by rewriting it using the
mandated style.
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Gurjeet Singh <gurjeet@singh.im>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jkatz@postgresql.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/F02F4B4F-7B7E-406A-B25A-FF2AA300AB9A@yesql.se
Previously we only allowed unique B-tree constraints on partitions
(and only if the constraint included all the partition keys). But we
could allow exclusion constraints with the same restriction. We also
require that those columns be compared for equality, not something
like &&.
Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Ronan Dunklau <ronan.dunklau@aiven.io>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/ec8b1d9b-502e-d1f8-e909-1bf9dffe6fa5@illuminatedcomputing.com
All supported computers have either POSIX or Windows threads, and we no
longer have any automated testing of --disable-thread-safety. We define
a vestigial ENABLE_THREAD_SAFETY macro to 1 in ecpg_config.h in case it
is useful, but we no longer test it anywhere in PostgreSQL code, and
associated dead code paths are removed.
The Meson and perl-based Windows build scripts never had an equivalent
build option.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGLtmexrpMtxBRLCVePqV_dtWG-ZsEbyPrYc%2BNBB2TkNsw%40mail.gmail.com
This commit adds two columns: indexes_total and indexes_processed, to
pg_stat_progress_vacuum system view to show the index vacuum
progress. These numbers are reported in the "vacuuming indexes" and
"cleaning up indexes" phases.
This uses the new parallel message type for progress reporting added
by be06506e7.
Bump catversion because this changes the definition of
pg_stat_progress_vacuum.
Author: Sami Imseih
Reviewed by: Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier, Nathan Bossart, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5478DFCD-2333-401A-B2F0-0D186AB09228@amazon.com
The DEFAULT parameter seems most similar to the NULL parameter, so
move it next to it, instead of having it at the end of the parameter
list because it was the last one added.
Comments in src/backend/libpq/auth.c say: (after successfully finding
the final DN to check the user-supplied password against)
/* Unbind and disconnect from the LDAP server */
and later
/*
* Need to re-initialize the LDAP connection, so that we can bind to
* it with a different username.
*/
But the protocol actually permits multiple subsequent authentications
("binds") over a single connection.
So, it seems like the whole connection re-initialization thing was
just a confusion and can be safely removed, thus saving quite a few
network round-trips, especially for the case of ldaps/starttls.
Author: Anatoly Zaretsky <anatoly.zaretsky@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CALbq6kmJ-1+58df4B51ctPfTOSyPbY8Qi2=ct8oR=i4TamkUoQ@mail.gmail.com
This is useful to show the allocation state of huge pages when setting
up a server with "huge_pages = try", where allocating huge pages would
be attempted but the server would continue its startup sequence even if
the allocation fails. The effective status of huge pages is not easily
visible without OS-level tools (or for instance, a lookup at
/proc/N/smaps), and the environments where Postgres runs may not
authorize that. Like the other GUCs related to huge pages, this works
for Linux and Windows.
This GUC can report as values:
- "on", if huge pages were allocated.
- "off", if huge pages were not allocated.
- "unknown", a special state that could only be seen when using for
example postgres -C because it is only possible to know if the shared
memory allocation worked after we can check for the GUC values, even if
checking a runtime-computed GUC. This value should never be seen when
querying for the GUC on a running server. An assertion is added to
check that.
The discussion has also turned around having a new function to grab this
status, but this would have required more tricks for -DEXEC_BACKEND,
something that GUCs already handle.
Noriyoshi Shinoda has initiated the thread that has led to the result of
this commit.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TU4PR8401MB1152EBB0D271F827E2E37A01EECC9@TU4PR8401MB1152.NAMPRD84.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
The documentation and the code is generated automatically from a new
file called wait_event_names.txt, formatted in sections dedicated to
each wait event class (Timeout, Lock, IO, etc.) with three tab-separated
fields:
- C symbol in enums
- Format in the system views
- Description in the docs
Using this approach has several advantages, as we have proved to be
rather bad in maintaining this area of the tree across the years:
- The order of each item in the documentation and the code, which should
be alphabetical, has become incorrect multiple times, and the script
generating the code and documentation has a few rules to enforce that,
making the maintenance a no-brainer.
- Some wait events were added to the code, but not documented, so this
cannot be missed now.
- The order of the tables for each wait event class is enforced in the
documentation (the input .txt file does so as well for clarity, though
this is not mandatory).
- Less code, shaving 1.2k lines from the tree, with 1/3 of the savings
coming from the code, the rest from the documentation.
The wait event types "Lock" and "LWLock" still have their own code path
for their code, hence only the documentation is created for them. These
classes are listed with a special marker called WAIT_EVENT_DOCONLY in
the input file.
Adding a new wait event now requires only an update of
wait_event_names.txt, with "Lock" and "LWLock" treated as exceptions.
This commit has been tested with configure/Makefile, the CI and VPATH
build. clean, distclean and maintainer-clean were working fine.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/77a86b3a-c4a8-5f5d-69b9-d70bbf2e9b98@gmail.com
The following routines are added to libpq:
PGresult *PQclosePrepared(PGconn *conn, const char *stmt);
PGresult *PQclosePortal(PGconn *conn, const char *portal);
int PQsendClosePrepared(PGconn *conn, const char *stmt);
int PQsendClosePortal(PGconn *conn, const char *portal);
The "send" routines are non-blocking versions of the two others.
Close messages are part of the protocol but they did not have a libpq
implementation. And, having these routines is for instance useful with
connection poolers as these can detect more easily Close messages
than DEALLOCATE queries.
The implementation takes advantage of what the Describe routines rely on
for portals and statements. Some regression tests are added in
libpq_pipeline, for the four new routines, by closing portals and
statements created already by the tests.
Author: Jelte Fennema
Reviewed-by: Jian He, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQTb4xFAopAVokudB+L62Kt44mNAL4Z9zZ7UTrs1TRFvWA@mail.gmail.com
This commit increases the size of the bgw_library_name member of
the BackgroundWorker struct from BGW_MAXLEN (96) bytes to MAXPGPATH
(default of 1024) bytes so that it can store longer file names
(e.g., absolute paths).
Author: Yurii Rashkovskii
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson, Aleksander Alekseev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BRLCQyjFV5Y8tG5QgUb6gjteL4S3p%2B1gcyqWTqigyM93WZ9Pg%40mail.gmail.com
Here are some notes about this change:
- As X509_get_signature_nid() should always exist (OpenSSL and
LibreSSL), hence HAVE_X509_GET_SIGNATURE_NID is now gone.
- OPENSSL_API_COMPAT is bumped to 0x10002000L.
- One comment related to 1.0.1e introduced by 74242c2 is removed.
Upstream OpenSSL still provides long-term support for 1.0.2 in a closed
fashion, so removing it is out of scope for a few years, at least.
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion, Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZG3JNursG69dz1lr@paquier.xyz
When set, this environment variable was only effective for data
directories but not for all the other temporary files created by
PostgreSQL::Test::Utils. Keeping the temporary files after a successful
run can be useful for debugging purposes.
The documentation is updated to reflect the new behavior, with contents
available in doc/ since v16 and in src/test/perl/README since v15.
Author: Jacob Champion
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAWbhmgHtDH1SGZ+Fw05CsXtE0mzTmjbuUxLB9mY9iPKgM6cUw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YyPd9unV14SX2bLF@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 11
This patch is a preliminary refactoring for an upcoming patch aimed at
adding new options to this tool, and using long options for these is
more user-friendly. The existing short options gain long flavors, as
of:
* -d/--debug
* -n/--dry-run
* -x/--strip-extension
Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d660ef741ce3d82f3b4283f1cafd576c@oss.nttdata.com
Not including the timeline IDs to the file names generated by pg_waldump
for the individual blocks saved could cause some of these files to be
overwritten when scanning segments across multiple timelines. Having
this information is also as much useful as the LSNs, to be able to know
from exactly which WAL segment a block is comes from.
While on it, this fixes a few comments in the tests, where the format of
the file was not described as matching with the reality.
Reported-by: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, David Christensen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZJp921+nITFnvBVS@paquier.xyz
The documentation of the required privileges for maintenance
commands (i.e., VACUUM, ANALYZE, CLUSTER, LOCK TABLE, REFRESH
MATERIALIZED VIEW, and REINDEX) is redundant, inaccurate, and
difficult to read. This commit fixes and simplifies this
documentation by removing references to ownership, superuser, and
the pg_maintain role. In addition, this removes notes about
database-wide VACUUM and ANALYZE, clarifies matters for REINDEX on
partitioned indexes and tables, and strengthens the description of
the pg_maintain role.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Jeff Davis
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230615041044.GA736001%40nathanxps13
ff9618e82a introduced has_partition_ancestor_privs(), which is used
to check whether a user has MAINTAIN on any partition ancestors.
This involves syscache lookups, and presently this function does
not take any relation locks, so it is likely subject to the same
kind of cache lookup failures that were fixed by 19de0ab23c.
To fix this problem, this commit partially reverts ff9618e82a.
Specifically, it removes the partition-related changes, including
the has_partition_ancestor_privs() function mentioned above. This
means that MAINTAIN on a partitioned table is no longer sufficient
to perform maintenance commands on its partitions. This is more
like how privileges for maintenance commands work on supported
versions. Privileges are checked for each partition, so a command
that flows down to all partitions might refuse to process them
(e.g., if the current user doesn't have MAINTAIN on the partition).
In passing, adjust a few related comments and error messages, and
add a test for the privilege checks for CLUSTER on a partitioned
table.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Jeff Davis
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230613211246.GA219055%40nathanxps13
By default, triggers and rules do not fire on a logical replication
subscriber based on the "session_replication_role" GUC being set to
"replica". However, the docs in the logical replication section assumed
that the reader understood how this GUC worked. This modifies the docs to
be more explicit and links back to the GUC itself.
Author: Jonathan Katz, Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, Euler Taveira
Backpatch-through: 11
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5bb2c9a2-499f-e1a2-6e33-5ce96b35cc4a@postgresql.org
Statistics defined by the CREATE STATISTICS command are only used to
assist with the selectivity estimations of base relations, never for
joins. Here we mention this fact in the notes section of the CREATE
STATISTICS command.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrMuVgDOrmg_EtFDZ=AOovq6EsJNnHH1ddyZ8EqL4yzMw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 11
The existing errhint message and docs were missing the fact that we can't
disassociate from the slot unless the subscription is disabled.
Author: Robert Sjöblom, Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Amit Kapila
Backpatch-through: 11
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/807bdf85-61ea-88e2-5712-6d9fcd4eabff@fortnox.se
For CREATE DATABASE, make LOCALE parameter apply regardless of the
provider used. Also affects initdb and createdb --locale arguments.
Previously, LOCALE (and --locale) only affected the database default
collation when using the libc provider.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1a63084d-221e-4075-619e-6b3e590f673e@enterprisedb.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
In the documentation, previously the example command for
ALTER FOREIGN TABLE ... OPTIONS incorrectly included both
the option name and value with the DROP operation.
The correct syntax for the DROP operation requires only
the name of the option to be specified. This commit fixes
the example by removing the option value from the DROP operation.
Back-patch to all supported versions.
Author: Mehmet Emin KARAKAS <emin100@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANQrdXAHzbcEYhjGoe5A42OmfvdQhHFJzyKj9gJvHuDKyOF5Ng@mail.gmail.com
The GUC settings lc_collate and lc_ctype are from a time when those
locale settings were cluster-global. When those locale settings were
made per-database (PG 8.4), the settings were kept as read-only. As
of PG 15, you can use ICU as the per-database locale provider, so
examining these settings is already less meaningful and possibly
confusing, since you need to look into pg_database to find out what is
really happening, and they would likely become fully obsolete in the
future anyway.
Reviewed-by: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/696054d1-bc88-b6ab-129a-18b8bce6a6f0@enterprisedb.com
2dcd1578c4 left the --role option undocumented, which is
inconsistent with other deprecated options such as pg_dump's
--blobs and --no-blobs. This change adds --role back to
createuser's documentation and usage output and marks it as
deprecated.
Suggested-by: Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0e85c9e7-4804-1cdb-5a4a-c72c328f9ad8%40enterprisedb.com
That's how other boolean options are handled, so do likewise.
The previous coding with "enable" and "disable" was seemingly
modeled on gssencmode, but that's a three-way flag.
While at it, add PGGSSDELEGATION to the set of environment
variables cleared by pg_regress and Utils.pm.
Abhijit Menon-Sen, per gripe from Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230522091609.nlyuu4nolhycqs2p@alvherre.pgsql
This change renames --admin to --with-admin, --role to --member-of,
and --member to --with-member. Many people found the previous
names to be confusing. The --admin and --member options are new in
v16, but --role has been there for a while, so that one has been
kept (but left undocumented) for backward compatibility.
Suggested-by: Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZFvVZvQDliIWmOwg%40momjian.us
Tweak column widths in a couple of tables to avoid "contents
... exceed the available area" warnings. Remove usage of
some non-Latin-1 characters.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/614600.1684537037@sss.pgh.pa.us
Complete the task begun in 9c0a0e2ed: we don't want to use the
abbreviation "deleg" for GSS delegation in any user-visible places.
(For consistency, this also changes most internal uses too.)
Abhijit Menon-Sen and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/949048.1684639317@sss.pgh.pa.us
* document to_reg* accepting OIDs
* document pg_log_standby_snapshot()
* document pg_input_is_valid() and pg_input_error_info()
* handle rename of function to pg_split_walfile_name()
* fix character encoding problem for Przemyslaw Sztoch
* remove partition section
Reported-by: jian he, Tom Lane, Bertrand Drouvot
Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files.
This set of diffs is a bit larger than typical. We've updated to
pg_bsd_indent 2.1.2, which properly indents variable declarations that
have multi-line initialization expressions (the continuation lines are
now indented one tab stop). We've also updated to perltidy version
20230309 and changed some of its settings, which reduces its desire to
add whitespace to lines to make assignments etc. line up. Going
forward, that should make for fewer random-seeming changes to existing
code.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230428092545.qfb3y5wcu4cm75ur@alvherre.pgsql
Non-leaf pages of GiST indexes contain key attributes, leaf pages
contain both key and non-key attributes, and gist_page_items() ignored
the handling of non-key attributes. This caused a few problems when
using gist_page_items() on a GiST index with INCLUDE:
- On a non-leaf page, the function would crash.
- On a leaf page, the function would work, but miss to display all the
values for included attributes.
This commit fixes gist_page_items() to handle such cases in a more
appropriate way, and now displays the values of key and non-key
attributes for each item separately in a style consistent with what
ruleutils.c would generate for the attribute list, depending on the page
type dealt with. In a way similar to how a record is displayed, values
would be double-quoted for key or non-key attributes if required.
ruleutils.c did not provide a routine able to control if non-key
attributes should be displayed, so an extended() routine for index
definitions is added to work around the leaf and non-leaf page
differences.
While on it, this commit fixes a third problem related to the amount of
data reported for key attributes. The code originally relied on
BuildIndexValueDescription() (used for error reports on constraints)
that would not print all the data stored in the index but the index
opclass's input type, so this limited the amount of information
available. This switch makes gist_page_items() much cheaper as there is
no need to run ACL checks for each item printed, which is not an issue
anyway as superuser rights are required to execute the functions of
pageinspect. Opclasses whose data cannot be displayed can rely on
gist_page_items_bytea().
The documentation of this function was slightly incorrect for the
output results generated on HEAD and v15, so adjust it on these
branches.
Author: Alexander Lakhin, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17884-cb8c326522977acb@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 14
Commit 3581cbdcd6 added a flag to identify empty BRIN ranges. This adds
the new flag to brin_page_items() output.
This is kept as a separate commit as it should not be backpatched.
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Matthias van de Meent, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/402430e4-7d9d-6cf1-09ef-464d80afff3b@enterprisedb.com
Separate the documentation for language tags themselves from the
available collation settings which can be included in a language tag.
Include tables of the available options, more details about the
effects of each option, and additional examples.
Also include an explanation of the "levels" of textual features and
how they relate to collation.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/25787ec7-4c04-9a8a-d241-4dc9be0b1ba3@postgresql.org
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz
28e626bde0 added the concept of IOOps but neglected to include writeback
operations. ac8d53dae5 added time spent doing these I/O operations. Without
counting writeback, checkpointer write time in the log often differed
substantially from that in pg_stat_io. To fix this, add IOOp IOOP_WRITEBACK
and track writeback in pg_stat_io.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230419172326.dhgyo4wrrhulovt6%40awork3.anarazel.de
Give the new GUC introduced by d4e71df6 a name that is clearly not
intended for mainstream use quite yet.
Future proposals would drop the prefix only after adding infrastructure
to make it efficient. Having the switch in the tree sooner is good
because it might lead to new discoveries about the hazards awaiting us
on a wide range of systems, but that name was too enticing and could
lead to cross-version confusion in future, per complaints from Noah and
Justin.
Suggested-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com> (the idea, not the patch)
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us> (ditto)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230430041106.GA2268796%40rfd.leadboat.com
Don't use PSQL_WATCH_PAGER when stdin/stdout are not a terminal.
This corresponds to the restrictions on when other commands will
use [PSQL_]PAGER. There isn't a lot of sense in trying to use a
pager in non-interactive cases, and doing so allows an environment
setting to break our tests.
Also, ignore PSQL_WATCH_PAGER if it is set but empty or all-blank,
for the same reasons we ignore such settings of [PSQL_]PAGER (see
commit 18f8f784c).
No documentation change is really needed, since there is nothing
suggesting that these constraints on [PSQL_]PAGER didn't already
apply to PSQL_WATCH_PAGER too. But I rearranged the text
a little to make it read more naturally (IMHO anyway).
Per report from Pavel Stehule. Back-patch to v15 where
PSQL_WATCH_PAGER was introduced.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRDTwFzmEWdA-gdAcUh0ZnxUioSfTMre71WyB_wNJy-8gw@mail.gmail.com
Fix a link from the "Heap-Only Tuples" documentation section.
Previously, its "fillfactor" link pointed to the "CREATE TABLE"
command's documentation. Now the link directly points to the fillfactor
storage parameter documentation (which is about half way into the
"CREATE TABLE" sect1).
Oversight in commit 115464bb.
Backpatch: 12-, the first version with a usable reloption link.
An update of the GUC stats_fetch_consistency in a transaction would be
able to trigger an assertion when doing cache->snapshot. In this case,
when retrieving a pgstat entry after the switch, a new snapshot would be
rebuilt, confusing pgstat_build_snapshot() because a snapshot is already
cached with an unexpected mode ("cache").
In order to fix this problem, this commit adds a flag to force a
snapshot clear each time this GUC is changed. Some tests are added to
check, while on it.
Some optimizations in avoiding the snapshot clear should be possible
depending on what is cached and the current GUC value, I guess, but this
solution is simple, and ensures that the state of the cache is updated
each time a new pgstat entry is fetched, hence being consistent with the
level wanted by the client that has set the GUC.
Note that cache->none and snapshot->none would not cause issues, as
fetching a pgstat entry would be retrieved from shared memory on the
second attempt, however a snapshot would still be cached. Similarly,
none->snapshot and none->cache would build a new snapshot on the second
fetch attempt. Finally, snapshot->cache would cache a new snapshot on
the second attempt.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17804-2a118cd046f2d0e5@postgresql.org
backpatch-through: 15
Commit 1de58df4, which added page-level freezing, taught VACUUM to reuse
each page's "set-visibility-map" snapshotConflictHorizon for freezing
(at least in the vast majority of cases where freezing went ahead).
This made VACUUM FREEZE much less prone to generating recovery conflicts
on standbys; VACUUM FREEZE became only slightly more likely to cause
recovery conflicts than an equivalent VACUUM.
Update old documentation that specifically warned of the likelihood of
recovery conflicts from VACUUM FREEZE. Explain the same general issue
(the issue of VACUUM generating recovery conflicts even in the absence
of dead row cleanup) using the example of conflicts caused by VISIBLE
WAL records.
Add:
- "Restartpoint"
- "Log sequence number"
"LSN" was already listed in the Acronyms appendix, but it is more
suitable as a glossary entry, so move it there and have the acronyms
entry link into the glossary.
Also turn on DocBook parameter glossentry.show.acronym to show
acronyms for glossary entries, which is being used here.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/60915312-62cd-9c94-0d94-556023ece45f%40enterprisedb.com
plperl, plpython, and pltcl all provide query-execution functions
that are thin wrappers around SPI_execute() or its variants.
The SPI functions document their row-count limit arguments clearly,
as "maximum number of rows to return, or 0 for no limit". However
the PLs' documentation failed to explain this special behavior of
zero, so that a reader might well assume it means "fetch zero
rows". Improve that.
Daniel Gustafsson and Tom Lane, per report from Kieran McCusker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGgUQ6H6qYScctOhktQ9HLFDDoafBKHyUgJbZ6q_dOApnzNTXg@mail.gmail.com
vacuum_defer_cleanup_age was introduced before hot_standby_feedback and
replication slots existed. It is hard to use reasonably - commonly it will
either be set too low (not preventing recovery conflicts, while still causing
some bloat), or too high (causing a lot of bloat). The alternatives do not
have that issue.
That on its own might not be sufficient reason to remove
vacuum_defer_cleanup_age, but it also complicates computation of xid
horizons. See e.g. the bug fixed in be504a3e97. It also is untested.
This commit removes TransactionIdRetreatSafely(), as there are no users
anymore. There might be potential future users, hence noting that here.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230317230930.nhsgk3qfk7f4axls@awork3.anarazel.de
Unaligned siglen could lead to an unaligned access to subsequent key fields.
Backpatch to 13, where opclass options were introduced.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Bug: 17847
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17847-171232970bea406b%40postgresql.org
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Pavel Borisov, Alexander Lakhin
Backpatch-through: 13
a9c70b46 added the statistics view pg_stat_io which contained columns
"io_context" and "io_object". Given that the columns are in the
pg_stat_io view, the "io" prefix is somewhat redundant, so remove it.
The code variables referring to these fields are kept unchanged so as
they can keep their context about I/O.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Fabrízio de Royes Mello
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_aAQoJWrvT2BYYQvJChFKra_O-5ra3jhzKJZqWsTR1CPQ@mail.gmail.com
indexes-unique.html mentioned nothing about the availability of NULLS NOT
DISTINCT to modify the NULLs-are-not-equal behavior of unique indexes.
Add this to the synopsis and clarify what it does regarding NULLs.
Author: David Gilman, David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALBH9DDr3NLqzWop1z5uZE-M5G_GYUuAeHFHQeyzFbNd8W0d=Q@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 15, where NULLS NOT DISTINCT was added
This issue can be reproduced by running `make dist` from the root of the
tree. Error introduced in fcb21b3, where additions of links in
installation.sgml require custom rules in standalone-profile.xsl to make
sure that ./INSTALL is generated correctly for the distribution tarball,
where links are replaced by equivalent terms from the profile file
changed by this commit.
Per buildfarm member guaibasaurus.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZD859FmcMRCNtz0W@paquier.xyz
We have two existing conventions for long options: either alphabetical
among short options, or all long options after all the short options.
But the convention apparently used here, next to a functionally
related option, is not one of them.
Here we remove the notes which mention which version the given vacuumdb
option is available from. There are now 11 of these notes and they're
both quite untidy and take up far more space than they seem to be worth.
On running a print preview of the compiled HTML, removing these notes
saves about 1 A4 page (~20% less space).
If people need to see which options are available on older versions, then
consulting the documents for that version seems like a good idea. In any
case, when using newer vacuumdb versions on older servers, the user will
receive an error if they try to use an unsupported option.
Additionally, 3 of the notes are warning about the option only being
available from PostgreSQL 9.6 and later. That version's support ended 2.5
years ago. So, it's quite clear that the value of these notes diminishes
over time.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrCQn6tupx2R67VL9RP1Qy4dDuWKRvt4jaB0vk2akQchw@mail.gmail.com
Other vacuumdb options seem to have notes about which version they're
available from, so let's follow this trend for the newly added
--buffer-usage-limit option.
This addresses various deficiencies in the documentation for VACUUM and
ANALYZE's BUFFER_USEAGE_LIMIT docs.
Here we declare "size" in the syntax synopsis for VACUUM and ANALYZE's
BUFFER_USAGE_LIMIT option and then define exactly what values can be
specified for it in the section for that below.
Also, fix the incorrect ordering of vacuumdb options both in the documents
and in vacuumdb's --help output. These should be in alphabetical order.
In passing also add the minimum/maximum range for the BUFFER_USAGE_LIMIT
option. These will also serve as example values that can be modified and
used.
Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16845cb1-b228-e157-f293-5892bced9253@enterprisedb.com
Starting with OpenSSL 1.1.0 there is no need to call PQinitOpenSSL
or PQinitSSL to avoid duplicate initialization of OpenSSL. Add a
note to the documentation to explain this.
Backpatch to all supported versions as older OpenSSL versions are
equally likely to be used for all branches.
Reported-by: Sebastien Flaesch <sebastien.flaesch@4js.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DBAP191MB12895BFFEC4B5FE0460D0F2FB0459@DBAP191MB1289.EURP191.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
Backpatch-through: 11, all supported versions
WHen building with GSSAPI support, explicitly require MIT Kerberos and
check for gssapi_ext.h in configure.ac and meson.build. Also add
documentation explicitly stating that we now require MIT Kerberos when
building with GSSAPI support.
Reveiwed by: Johnathan Katz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abcc73d0-acf7-6896-e0dc-f5bc12a61bb1@postgresql.org
This reverts commit 3d03b24c3 (Revert Add support for Kerberos
credential delegation) which was committed on the grounds of concern
about portability, but on further review and discussion, it's clear that
we are better off explicitly requiring MIT Kerberos as that appears to
be the only GSSAPI library currently that's under proper maintenance
and ongoing development. The API used for storing credentials was added
to MIT Kerberos over a decade ago while for the other libraries which
appear to be mainly based on Heimdal, which exists explicitly to be a
re-implementation of MIT Kerberos, the API never made it to a released
version (even though it was added to the Heimdal git repo over 5 years
ago..).
This post-feature-freeze change was approved by the RMT.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZDDO6jaESKaBgej0%40tamriel.snowman.net
In the HTML output, this decorates section headers and variable list
terms with a marker ("#") that is a link to the same section/term.
That way, links inside a page can be discovered for easier sharing.
The marker only appears when hovering.
This now requires that all elements that are candidates for such a
link have an id attribute. Otherwise, an error will be generated.
All previously missing ids have been added prior to this patch.
Author: Brar Piening <brar@gmx.de>
Reviewed-by: Karl O. Pinc <kop@karlpinc.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAB8KJ=jpuQU9QJe4+RgWENrK5g9jhoysMw2nvTN_esoOU0=a_w@mail.gmail.com
This reverts commit e056c557ae and minor later fixes thereof.
There's a few problems in this new feature -- most notably regarding
pg_upgrade behavior, but others as well. This new feature is not in any
way critical on its own, so instead of scrambling to fix it we revert it
and try again in early 17 with these issues in mind.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3801207.1681057430@sss.pgh.pa.us
The previous wording used MVF to indicate the Most Common Values'
Frequencies, but the abbreviation was never explained or defined.
Reword to mcv_freqs to make the use clearer.
Also add MCF and MCV as acronyms as they were using <acronym>
markup but were missing from the acronyms page.
Reported-by: Eric Mutta <eric.mutta@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/166112292492.654.5377188452604176150@wrigleys.postgresql.org
The tables in "71.3. Extensibility" listing the support functions
for bloom and minmax-multi opclasses should include the associated
options function. While this isn't quite as required as the rest,
you need it for full functionality of the opclass.
Back-patch to v14 where these functions were added.
We cannot use the generic array_desc approach with per-tuple nbtree
posting list update metadata because array_desc can only deal with fixed
width elements (e.g., page offset numbers). Using array_desc led to
incorrect rmgr descriptions for updates from nbtree DELETE/VACUUM WAL
records.
To fix, add specialized code to describe the update metadata as array
elements in desc output. We now iterate over the update metadata using
an approach that matches related REDO routines.
Also stop showing the updates offset number array separately in nbtree
DELETE/VACUUM desc output. It's redundant information, since the same
page offset numbers appear in the description of each individual update
element. Also make some small tweaks to the way that we format arrays
in all desc routines (not just nbtree desc routines) to make arrays a
little less verbose.
Oversight in commit 1c453cfd, which enhanced the nbtree rmgr desc
routines.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkbYuvwYKm-Y-72QEh6SPMQcAo9uONv+mR3bMGcu9E_Cg@mail.gmail.com
EXTRACT(EPOCH), EXTRACT(SECOND), and some related cases print more
trailing zeroes than they used to. This behavior change happened
with commit a2da77cdb (Change return type of EXTRACT to numeric),
and it was intentional according to the commit log:
- Return values when extracting fields with possibly fractional
values, such as second and epoch, now have the full scale that the
value has internally (so, for example, '1.000000' instead of just
'1').
It's been like that for two releases now, so while I suggested
changing this back, it's probably better to adjust the documentation
examples.
Per bug #17866 from Евгений Жужнев. Back-patch to v14 where the
change came in.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17866-18eb70095b1594e2@postgresql.org
This reverts commit 3d4fa227bc.
Per discussion and buildfarm, this depends on APIs that seem to not
be available on at least one platform (NetBSD). Should be certainly
possible to rework to be optional on that platform if necessary but bit
late for that at this point.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3286097.1680922218@sss.pgh.pa.us
Unsurprisingly, this requires wal_level = logical to be set on the primary and
standby. The infrastructure added in 26669757b6 ensures that slots are
invalidated if the primary's wal_level is lowered.
Creating a slot on a standby waits for a xl_running_xact record to be
processed. If the primary is idle (and thus not emitting xl_running_xact
records), that can take a while. To make that faster, this commit also
introduces the pg_log_standby_snapshot() function. By executing it on the
primary, completion of slot creation on the standby can be accelerated.
Note that logical decoding on a standby does not itself enforce that required
catalog rows are not removed. The user has to use physical replication slots +
hot_standby_feedback or other measures to prevent that. If catalog rows
required for a slot are removed, the slot is invalidated.
See 6af1793954 for an overall design of logical decoding on a standby.
Bumps catversion, for the addition of the pg_log_standby_snapshot() function.
Author: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (in an older version)
Author: Amit Khandekar <amitdkhan.pg@gmail.com> (in an older version)
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: FabrÌzio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
During WAL replay on the standby, when a conflict with a logical slot is
identified, invalidate such slots. There are two sources of conflicts:
1) Using the information added in 6af1793954, logical slots are invalidated if
required rows are removed
2) wal_level on the primary server is reduced to below logical
Uses the infrastructure introduced in the prior commit. FIXME: add commit
reference.
Change InvalidatePossiblyObsoleteSlot() to use a recovery conflict to
interrupt use of a slot, if called in the startup process. The new recovery
conflict is added to pg_stat_database_conflicts, as confl_active_logicalslot.
See 6af1793954 for an overall design of logical decoding on a standby.
Bumps catversion for the addition of the pg_stat_database_conflicts column.
Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID for the same reason.
Author: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Amit Khandekar <amitdkhan.pg@gmail.com> (in an older version)
Reviewed-by: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230407075009.igg7be27ha2htkbt@awork3.anarazel.de
Needed for logical decoding on a standby. Slots need to be invalidated because
of the horizon if rows required for logical decoding are removed. If the
primary's wal_level is lowered from 'logical', logical slots on the standby
need to be invalidated.
The new invalidation methods will be used in a subsequent commit.
Logical slots that have been invalidated can be identified via the new
pg_replication_slots.conflicting column.
See 6af1793954 for an overall design of logical decoding on a standby.
Bumps catversion for the addition of the new pg_replication_slots column.
Author: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Amit Khandekar <amitdkhan.pg@gmail.com> (in an older version)
Reviewed-by: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230407075009.igg7be27ha2htkbt@awork3.anarazel.de
Provide a way to ask the kernel to use O_DIRECT (or local equivalent)
where available for data and WAL files, to avoid or minimize kernel
caching. This hurts performance currently and is not intended for end
users yet. Later proposed work would introduce our own I/O clustering,
read-ahead, etc to replace the facilities the kernel disables with this
option.
The only user-visible change, if the developer-only GUC is not used, is
that this commit also removes the obscure logic that would activate
O_DIRECT for the WAL when wal_sync_method=open_[data]sync and
wal_level=minimal (which also requires max_wal_senders=0). Those are
non-default and unlikely settings, and this behavior wasn't (correctly)
documented. The same effect can be achieved with io_direct=wal.
Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGK1X532hYqJ_MzFWt0n1zt8trz980D79WbjwnT-yYLZpg%40mail.gmail.com
Support GSSAPI/Kerberos credentials being delegated to the server by a
client. With this, a user authenticating to PostgreSQL using Kerberos
(GSSAPI) credentials can choose to delegate their credentials to the
PostgreSQL server (which can choose to accept them, or not), allowing
the server to then use those delegated credentials to connect to
another service, such as with postgres_fdw or dblink or theoretically
any other service which is able to be authenticated using Kerberos.
Both postgres_fdw and dblink are changed to allow non-superuser
password-less connections but only when GSSAPI credentials have been
delegated to the server by the client and GSSAPI is used to
authenticate to the remote system.
Authors: Stephen Frost, Peifeng Qiu
Reviewed-By: David Christensen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CO1PR05MB8023CC2CB575E0FAAD7DF4F8A8E29@CO1PR05MB8023.namprd05.prod.outlook.com
a9c70b46db and 8aaa04b32S added counting of IO operations to a new view,
pg_stat_io. Now, add IO timing for reads, writes, extends, and fsyncs to
pg_stat_io as well.
This combines the tracking for pgBufferUsage with the tracking for pg_stat_io
into a new function pgstat_count_io_op_time(). This should make it a bit
easier to avoid the somewhat costly instr_time conversion done for
pgBufferUsage.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/CAAKRu_ay5iKmnbXZ3DsauViF3eMxu4m1oNnJXqV_HyqYeg55Ww%40mail.gmail.com
Add helper functions that output arrays in a standard format, and use
the functions inside heapdesc routines. This allows tools like
pg_walinspect to show a detailed description of the page offset number
arrays for records like PRUNE and VACUUM (unless there was an FPI).
Also document the conventions that desc routines should follow. Only
the heapdesc routines follow the conventions for now, so they're just
guidelines for the time being.
Based on a suggestion from Andres Freund.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/20230109215842.fktuhesvayno6o4g%40awork3.anarazel.de
This modernized version of Soundex works significantly better than
the original, particularly for non-English names.
Dag Lem, reviewed by quite a few people along the way
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/yger1atbgfy.fsf@sid.nimrod.no
It was pointed out that pg_buffercache_summary()'s report of
the overall average usage count isn't that useful, and what
would be more helpful in many cases is to report totals for
each possible usage count. Add a new function to do it like
that. Since pg_buffercache 1.4 is already new for v16,
we don't need to create a new extension version; we'll just
define this as part of 1.4.
Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230130233040.GA2800702@nathanxps13
We now create pg_constaint rows for NOT NULL constraints with
contype='n'.
We propagate these constraints during operations such as adding
inheritance relationships, creating and attaching partitions, creating
tables LIKE other tables. We mostly follow the well-known rules of
conislocal and coninhcount that we have for CHECK constraints, with some
adaptations; for example, as opposed to CHECK constraints, we don't
match NOT NULL ones by name when descending a hierarchy to alter it;
instead we match by column number. This means we don't require the
constraint names to be identical across a hierarchy.
For now, we omit them from system catalogs. Maybe this is worth
reconsidering. We don't support NOT VALID nor DEFERRABLE clauses
either; these can be added as separate features later (this patch is
already large and complicated enough.)
This has been very long in the making. The first patch was written by
Bernd Helmle in 2010 to add a new pg_constraint.contype value ('n'),
which I (Álvaro) then hijacked in 2011 and 2012, until that one was
killed by the realization that we ought to use contype='c' instead:
manufactured CHECK constraints. However, later SQL standard
development, as well as nonobvious emergent properties of that design
(mostly, failure to distinguish them from "normal" CHECK constraints as
well as the performance implication of having to test the CHECK
expression) led us to reconsider this choice, so now the current
implementation uses contype='n' again.
In 2016 Vitaly Burovoy also worked on this feature[1] but found no
consensus for his proposed approach, which was claimed to be closer to
the letter of the standard, requiring additional pg_attribute columns to
track the OID of the NOT NULL constraint for that column.
[1] https://postgr.es/m/CAKOSWNkN6HSyatuys8xZxzRCR-KL1OkHS5-b9qd9bf1Rad3PLA@mail.gmail.com
Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACA0E642A0267EDA387AF2B%40%5B172.26.14.62%5D
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/AANLkTinLXMOEMz+0J29tf1POokKi4XDkWJ6-DDR9BKgU@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20110707213401.GA27098@alvh.no-ip.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1343682669-sup-2532@alvh.no-ip.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKOSWNkN6HSyatuys8xZxzRCR-KL1OkHS5-b9qd9bf1Rad3PLA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220817181249.q7qvj3okywctra3c@alvherre.pgsql
The old wording described these as being multiplied by max_connections
plus max_prepared_transactions, which hasn't been exactly right for
some time thanks to the addition of various auxiliary processes.
Moreover, exactness here is a bit pointless given that the lock tables
can expand into the initially-unallocated "slop" space in shared
memory. Rather than trying to track exactly what the code is doing,
let's just use the term "server processes".
Likewise adjust these GUCs' description strings in guc_tables.c.
Wang Wei, reviewed by Nathan Bossart and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS3PR01MB6275BDD09C9B875C65FCC5AB9EA39@OS3PR01MB6275.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
1cbbee033 added BUFFER_USAGE_LIMIT to the VACUUM and ANALYZE commands, so
here we permit that option to be specified in vacuumdb.
In passing, adjust the documents for vacuum_buffer_usage_limit and the
BUFFER_USAGE_LIMIT VACUUM option to mention "kB" rather than "KB". Do the
same for the ERROR message in ExecVacuum() and
check_vacuum_buffer_usage_limit(). Without that we might tell a user that
the valid minimum value is 128 KB only to reject that because we accept
only "kB" and not "KB".
Also, add a small reminder comment in vacuum.h to try to trigger the
memory of anyone adding new fields to VacuumParams that they might want to
consider if vacuumdb needs to grow a new option too.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZAzTg3iEnubscvbf@telsasoft.com
Add new options to the VACUUM and ANALYZE commands called
BUFFER_USAGE_LIMIT to allow users more control over how large to make the
buffer access strategy that is used to limit the usage of buffers in
shared buffers. Larger rings can allow VACUUM to run more quickly but
have the drawback of VACUUM possibly evicting more buffers from shared
buffers that might be useful for other queries running on the database.
Here we also add a new GUC named vacuum_buffer_usage_limit which controls
how large to make the access strategy when it's not specified in the
VACUUM/ANALYZE command. This defaults to 256KB, which is the same size as
the access strategy was prior to this change. This setting also
controls how large to make the buffer access strategy for autovacuum.
Per idea by Andres Freund.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230111182720.ejifsclfwymw2reb@awork3.anarazel.de
Make the \g, \o, \w, and \copy commands set these variables
when closing a pipe. We missed doing this in commit b0d8f2d98,
but it seems like a good idea.
There are some remaining places in psql that intentionally don't
update these variables after running a child program:
* pager invocations
* backtick evaluation within a prompt
* \e (edit query buffer)
Corey Huinker and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=eSKwRGF-rnRqhtBORRtL49QsjcVUCa-kLxKTqxypsakw@mail.gmail.com
\watch can now be told to stop after N executions of the query.
With the idea that we might want to add more options to \watch
in future, this patch generalizes the command's syntax to a list
of name=value options, with the interval allowed to omit the name
for backwards compatibility.
Andrey Borodin, reviewed by Kyotaro Horiguchi, Nathan Bossart,
Michael Paquier, Yugo Nagata, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAhFRxiZ2-n_L1ErMm9AZjgmUK=qS6VHb+0SaMn8sqqbhF7How@mail.gmail.com
zstd compression supports a special mode for finding matched in distant
past, which may result in better compression ratio, at the expense of
using more memory (the window size is 128MB).
To enable this optional mode, use the "long" keyword when specifying the
compression method (--compress=zstd:long).
Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Jacob Champion
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230224191840.GD1653@telsasoft.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220327205020.GM28503@telsasoft.com
postgres_fdw aborts remote (sub)transactions opened on remote server(s)
in a local (sub)transaction one by one when the local (sub)transaction
aborts. This patch allows it to abort the remote (sub)transactions in
parallel to improve performance. This is enabled by the server option
"parallel_abort". The default is false.
Etsuro Fujita, reviewed by David Zhang.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAPmGK15FuPVGx3TGHKShsbPKKtF1y58-ZLcKoxfN-nqLj1dZ%3Dg%40mail.gmail.com
The primary bottlenecks for relation extension are:
1) The extension lock is held while acquiring a victim buffer for the new
page. Acquiring a victim buffer can require writing out the old page
contents including possibly needing to flush WAL.
2) When extending via ReadBuffer() et al, we write a zero page during the
extension, and then later write out the actual page contents. This can
nearly double the write rate.
3) The existing bulk relation extension infrastructure in hio.c just amortized
the cost of acquiring the relation extension lock, but none of the other
costs.
Unfortunately 1) cannot currently be addressed in a central manner as the
callers to ReadBuffer() need to acquire the extension lock. To address that,
this this commit moves the responsibility for acquiring the extension lock
into bufmgr.c functions. That allows to acquire the relation extension lock
for just the required time. This will also allow us to improve relation
extension further, without changing callers.
The reason we write all-zeroes pages during relation extension is that we hope
to get ENOSPC errors earlier that way (largely works, except for CoW
filesystems). It is easier to handle out-of-space errors gracefully if the
page doesn't yet contain actual tuples. This commit addresses 2), by using the
recently introduced smgrzeroextend(), which extends the relation, without
dirtying the kernel page cache for all the extended pages.
To address 3), this commit introduces a function to extend a relation by
multiple blocks at a time.
There are three new exposed functions: ExtendBufferedRel() for extending the
relation by a single block, ExtendBufferedRelBy() to extend a relation by
multiple blocks at once, and ExtendBufferedRelTo() for extending a relation up
to a certain size.
To avoid duplicating code between ReadBuffer(P_NEW) and the new functions,
ReadBuffer(P_NEW) now implements relation extension with
ExtendBufferedRel(), using a flag to tell ExtendBufferedRel() that the
relation lock is already held.
Note that this commit does not yet lead to a meaningful performance or
scalability improvement - for that uses of ReadBuffer(P_NEW) will need to be
converted to ExtendBuffered*(), which will be done in subsequent commits.
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221029025420.eplyow6k7tgu6he3@awork3.anarazel.de
This adds a new option to libpq's sslrootcert, "system", which will load
the system trusted CA roots for certificate verification. This is a more
convenient way to achieve this than pointing to the system CA roots
manually since the location can differ by installation and be locally
adjusted by env vars in OpenSSL.
When sslrootcert is set to system, sslmode is forced to be verify-full
as weaker modes aren't providing much security for public CAs.
Changing the location of the system roots by setting environment vars is
not supported by LibreSSL so the tests will use a heuristic to determine
if the system being tested is LibreSSL or OpenSSL.
The workaround in .cirrus.yml is required to handle a strange interaction
between homebrew and the openssl@3 formula; hopefully this can be removed
in the near future.
The original patch was written by Thomas Habets, which was later revived
by Jacob Champion.
Author: Jacob Champion <jchampion@timescale.com>
Author: Thomas Habets <thomas@habets.se>
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander <magnus@hagander.net>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA%2BkHd%2BcJwCUxVb-Gj_0ptr3_KZPwi3%2B67vK6HnLFBK9MzuYrLA%40mail.gmail.com
Allow pg_dump to use the zstd compression, in addition to gzip/lz4. Bulk
of the new compression method is implemented in compress_zstd.{c,h},
covering the pg_dump compression APIs. The rest of the patch adds test
and makes various places aware of the new compression method.
The zstd library (which this patch relies on) supports multithreaded
compression since version 1.5. We however disallow that feature for now,
as it might interfere with parallel backups on platforms that rely on
threads (e.g. Windows). This can be improved / relaxed in the future.
This also fixes a minor issue in InitDiscoverCompressFileHandle(), which
was not updated to check if the file already has the .lz4 extension.
Adding zstd compression was originally proposed in 2020 (see the second
thread), but then was reworked to use the new compression API introduced
in e9960732a9. I've considered both threads when compiling the list of
reviewers.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Jacob Champion, Andreas Karlsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230224191840.GD1653@telsasoft.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201221194924.GI30237@telsasoft.com
Since 8b9e9644d, the messages for failed permissions checks report
"table" where appropriate, rather than "relation".
Backpatch to all supported branches
The meson docs generation hardcoded using the website style so far. Make it
configurable via a meson option.
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3fc3bb9b-f7f8-d442-35c1-ec82280c564a@enterprisedb.com
Until now the meson built docs did not have a working reference to the css
stylesheet, it was copied in the make target. Instead of duplicating that for
meson, use the docbook-xsl parameter custom.css.source to reference it. An
additional benefit of that approach is that the stylesheet is now included in
the single-file HTML documentation.
Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3fc3bb9b-f7f8-d442-35c1-ec82280c564a@enterprisedb.com
Until now the meson built HTML docs had non-working references to images. They
were copied in the make target. Instead of duplicating that for meson, copy
them as part of the xslt stylesheet.
Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3fc3bb9b-f7f8-d442-35c1-ec82280c564a@enterprisedb.com
Detect and report if the tools necessary to build documentation are available
during configure. This is represented as two new options 'docs' and
'docs_pdf', both defaulting to 'auto'.
This should also fix a meson error about the installdocs target, when none of
the doc tools are found.
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230325201414.sh7c6xlut2fpunnv@awork3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZB8331v5IhUA/pNu@telsasoft.com
We had partial support for generating documentation suitable for .chm
files. However, we only had wired up generating the input files using
docbook-xsl, not generating an actual .chm file. Nor did we document how to do
so. Additionally, it was very slow to generate htmlhelp, as we never applied
the docbook-xsl stylesheet performance improvements to htmlhelp.
It doesn't look like there's any interest in the htmlhelp output, so remove
it, instead of spending cycles to finish the support.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230324165822.wcrj3akllbqquy7u@awork3.anarazel.de
The explanation describing the dependency to system read() calls for
these two functions has been removed in ddfc2d9. And after more
discussion about d69c404, we have concluded that adding more details
makes them easier to understand.
While on it, use the term "block read requests" (maybe found in cache)
rather than "buffers fetched" and "buffer hits".
Per discussion with Melanie Plageman, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Bertrand
Drouvot and myself.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_ZmdiScT4q83OAbfmR5AH-L5zWya3SXjaxiJvhCob-e2A@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 11
Convert to BCP47 language tags before storing in the catalog, except
during binary upgrade or when the locale comes from an existing
collation or template database.
The resulting language tags can vary slightly between ICU
versions. For instance, "@colBackwards=yes" is converted to
"und-u-kb-true" in older versions of ICU, and to the simpler (but
equivalent) "und-u-kb" in newer versions.
The process of canonicalizing to a language tag also understands more
input locale string formats than ucol_open(). For instance,
"fr_CA.UTF-8" is misinterpreted by ucol_open() and the region is
ignored; effectively treating it the same as the locale "fr" and
opening the wrong collator. Canonicalization properly interprets the
language and region, resulting in the language tag "fr-CA", which can
then be understood by ucol_open().
This commit fixes a problem in prior versions due to ucol_open()
misinterpreting locale strings as described above. For instance,
creating an ICU collation with locale "fr_CA.UTF-8" would store that
string directly in the catalog, which would later be passed to (and
misinterpreted by) ucol_open(). After this commit, the locale string
will be canonicalized to language tag "fr-CA" in the catalog, which
will be properly understood by ucol_open(). Because this fix affects
the resulting collator, we cannot change the locale string stored in
the catalog for existing databases or collations; otherwise we'd risk
corrupting indexes. Therefore, only canonicalize locales for
newly-created (not upgraded) collations/databases. For similar
reasons, do not backport.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8c7af6820aed94dc7bc259d2aa7f9663518e6137.camel@j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Invent "GET DIAGNOSTICS oid_variable = PG_ROUTINE_OID".
This is useful for avoiding the maintenance nuisances that come
with embedding a function's name in its body, as one might do
for logging purposes for example. Typically users would cast the
result to regproc or regprocedure to get something human-readable,
but we won't pre-judge whether that's appropriate.
Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Kirk Wolak and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRA4zMd5pY-B89Gm64bDLRt-L+akOd34aD1j4PEstHHSVQ@mail.gmail.com
This option is normally false, but can be set to true to obtain
the legacy behavior where the subscription runs with the permissions
of the subscription owner rather than the permissions of the
table owner. The advantages of this mode are (1) it doesn't require
that the subscription owner have permission to SET ROLE to each
table owner and (2) since no role switching occurs, the
SECURITY_RESTRICTED_OPERATION restrictions do not apply.
On the downside, it allows any table owner to easily usurp
the privileges of the subscription owner - basically, to take
over their account. Because that's generally quite undesirable,
we don't make this mode the default, but we do make it available,
just in case the new behavior causes too many problems for someone.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZ-WEeG6Z14AfH7KhmpX2eFh+tZ0z+vf0=eMDdbda269g@mail.gmail.com
Up until now, logical replication actions have been performed as the
subscription owner, who will generally be a superuser. Commit
cec57b1a0f documented hazards
associated with that situation, namely, that any user who owns a
table on the subscriber side could assume the privileges of the
subscription owner by attaching a trigger, expression index, or
some other kind of executable code to it. As a remedy, it suggested
not creating configurations where users who are not fully trusted
own tables on the subscriber.
Although that will work, it basically precludes using logical
replication in the way that people typically want to use it,
namely, to replicate a database from one node to another
without necessarily having any restrictions on which database
users can own tables. So, instead, change logical replication to
execute INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, and TRUNCATE operations as the
table owner when they are replicated.
Since this involves switching the active user frequently within
a session that is authenticated as the subscription user, also
impose SECURITY_RESTRICTED_OPERATION restrictions on logical
replication code. As an exception, if the table owner can SET
ROLE to the subscription owner, these restrictions have no
security value, so don't impose them in that case.
Subscription owners are now required to have the ability to
SET ROLE to every role that owns a table that the subscription
is replicating. If they don't, replication will fail. Superusers,
who normally own subscriptions, satisfy this property by default.
Non-superusers users who own subscriptions will need to be
granted the roles that own relevant tables.
Patch by me, reviewed (but not necessarily in its entirety) by
Jelte Fennema, Jeff Davis, and Noah Misch.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaSCkg9ww9oppPqqs+9RVqCexYCE6Aq=UsYPfnOoDeFkw@mail.gmail.com
The trace point was using the relfileno / fork / block for the to-be-read-in
buffer. Some upcoming work would make that more expensive to provide. We still
have buffer-flush-start/done, which can serve most tracing needs that
buffer-write-dirty could serve.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f5164e7a-eef6-8972-75a3-8ac622ed0c6e@iki.fi
Traditionally, vacuum always makes use of a buffer access strategy 32
buffers in size. This means that running vacuums tend not to cause too
many shared buffers to become dirty, however, this can cause vacuums to
run much more slowly than they otherwise could as WAL flushes will occur
more frequently due to having to flush WAL out to the LSN of the dirty
page before that page can be written to disk.
When we are performing failsafe VACUUMs (as added in 1e55e7d17), we really
want to make the vacuum work go as quickly as possible, so here we disable
the buffer access strategy when entering failsafe mode while vacuuming a
relation.
Per idea and analyis from Andres Freund.
In passing, also include some changes I had intended for 32fbe0239.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230111182720.ejifsclfwymw2reb%40awork3.anarazel.de
It seems useful to add this to the glossary as there's discussion around
adding an option to VACUUM to disable and adjust the size of the buffer
access strategy that VACUUM uses.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZBYDTrD1kyGg%2BHkS%40telsasoft.com
Allow users to opt out of returning FPI data and block data from
pg_get_wal_block_info as an optimization. Testing has shown that this
can make function execution over twice as fast in some cases.
When pg_get_wal_block_info is called with "show_data := false", it
always returns NULL values for its block_data and block_fpi_data bytea
output parameters. Nothing else changes. In particular, the function
will still return the usual per-block summary of block data/FPI space
overhead. Use of "show_data := false" is therefore feasible with all
queries that don't specifically require these raw binary strings.
Follow-up to recent work in commit 122376f0. There still hasn't been a
stable release with the pg_get_wal_block_info function, so no bump in
the pg_walinspect extension version.
Per suggestion from Melanie Plageman.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_bJvbcYBRj2cN6G2xV7B7-Ja+pjTO1nEnEhRR8OXYiABA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzm9shOkEDM10_+qOZkRSQhKVxwBFiehH6EHWQQRd_rDPw@mail.gmail.com
This patch introduces the SQL standard IS JSON predicate. It operates
on text and bytea values representing JSON, as well as on the json and
jsonb types. Each test has IS and IS NOT variants and supports a WITH
UNIQUE KEYS flag. The tests are:
IS JSON [VALUE]
IS JSON ARRAY
IS JSON OBJECT
IS JSON SCALAR
These should be self-explanatory.
The WITH UNIQUE KEYS flag makes these return false when duplicate keys
exist in any object within the value, not necessarily directly contained
in the outermost object.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAF4Au4w2x-5LTnN_bxky-mq4=WOqsGsxSpENCzHRAzSnEd8+WQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
This converts pg_regress output format to emit TAP compliant output
while keeping it as human readable as possible for use without TAP
test harnesses. As verbose harness related information isn't really
supported by TAP this also reduces the verbosity of pg_regress runs
which makes scrolling through log output in buildfarm/CI runs a bit
easier as well.
As the meson TAP parser conumes whitespace, the leading indentation
for differentiating parallel tests from sequential tests has been
changed to a single character prefix.
This patch has been around for an extended period of time, reviewers
listed below may have been involved in reviewing a version quite
different from the version in this commit. The original idea for
this patch was a hacking session with Jinbao Chen.
TAP format testing is also enabled in meson as of this.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Nikolay Shaplov <dhyan@nataraj.su>
Reviewed-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/BD4B107D-7E53-4794-ACBA-275BEB4327C9@yesql.se
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220221164736.rq3ornzjdkmwk2wo@alap3.anarazel.de
Among other things, this should make it easier to calculate a useful cache hit
ratio by excluding buffer reads via buffer access strategies. As buffer access
strategies reuse buffers (and thus evict the prior buffer contents), it is
normal to see reads on repeated scans of the same data.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_beMa9Hzih40%3DXPYqhDVz6tsgUGTrhZXRo%3Dunp%2Bszb%3DUA%40mail.gmail.com
Expand the output parameters in pg_walinspect's pg_get_wal_block_info
function to return additional information that was previously only
available from pg_walinspect's pg_get_wal_records_info function. Some
of the details are attributed to individual block references, rather
than aggregated into whole-record values, since the function returns one
row per block reference per WAL record (unlike pg_get_wal_records_info,
which always returns one row per WAL record).
This structure is much easier to work with when writing queries that
track how individual blocks changed over time, or when attributing costs
to individual blocks (not WAL records) is useful.
This is the second time that pg_get_wal_block_info has been enhanced in
recent weeks. Commit 9ecb134a expanded on the original version of the
function added in commit c31cf1c0 (where it first appeared under the
name pg_get_wal_fpi_info). There still hasn't been a stable release
since commit c31cf1c0, so no bump in the pg_walinspect extension
version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACVRK5=Z+2ZVsjgTTSkfEnQzCuwny7iigpG7g1btk4Ws2A@mail.gmail.com
This role can be granted to non-superusers to allow them to issue
CREATE SUBSCRIPTION. The non-superuser must additionally have CREATE
permissions on the database in which the subscription is to be
created.
Most forms of ALTER SUBSCRIPTION, including ALTER SUBSCRIPTION .. SKIP,
now require only that the role performing the operation own the
subscription, or inherit the privileges of the owner. However, to
use ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... RENAME or ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... OWNER TO,
you also need CREATE permission on the database. This is similar to
what we do for schemas. To change the owner of a schema, you must also
have permission to SET ROLE to the new owner, similar to what we do
for other object types.
Non-superusers are required to specify a password for authentication
and the remote side must use the password, similar to what is required
for postgres_fdw and dblink. A superuser who wants a non-superuser to
own a subscription that does not rely on password authentication may
set the new password_required=false property on that subscription. A
non-superuser may not set password_required=false and may not modify a
subscription that already has password_required=false.
This new password_required subscription property works much like the
eponymous postgres_fdw property. In both cases, the actual semantics
are that a password is not required if either (1) the property is set
to false or (2) the relevant user is the superuser.
Patch by me, reviewed by Andres Freund, Jeff Davis, Mark Dilger,
and Stephen Frost (but some of those people did not fully endorse
all of the decisions that the patch makes).
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaDH=0Xj7OBiQnsHTKcF2c4L+=gzPBUKSJLh8zed2_+Dg@mail.gmail.com
This adds support for load balancing connections with libpq using a
connection parameter: load_balance_hosts=<string>. When setting the
param to random, hosts and addresses will be connected to in random
order. This then results in load balancing across these addresses and
hosts when multiple clients or frequent connection setups are used.
The randomization employed performs two levels of shuffling:
1. The given hosts are randomly shuffled, before resolving them
one-by-one.
2. Once a host its addresses get resolved, the returned addresses
are shuffled, before trying to connect to them one-by-one.
Author: Jelte Fennema <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck <mbanck@gmx.net>
Reviewed-by: Andrey Borodin <amborodin86@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/PR3PR83MB04768E2FF04818EEB2179949F7A69@PR3PR83MB0476.EURPRD83.prod.outlook.
This commit introduces the SQL/JSON standard-conforming constructors for
JSON types:
JSON_ARRAY()
JSON_ARRAYAGG()
JSON_OBJECT()
JSON_OBJECTAGG()
Most of the functionality was already present in PostgreSQL-specific
functions, but these include some new functionality such as the ability
to skip or include NULL values, and to allow duplicate keys or throw
error when they are found, as well as the standard specified syntax to
specify output type and format.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAF4Au4w2x-5LTnN_bxky-mq4=WOqsGsxSpENCzHRAzSnEd8+WQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
When there are multiple publications for a subscription and one of those
publishes via the parent table by using publish_via_partition_root and the
other one directly publishes the child table, we end up copying the same
data twice during initial synchronization. The reason for this was that we
get both the parent and child tables from the publisher and try to copy
the data for both of them.
This patch extends the function pg_get_publication_tables() to take a
publication list as its input parameter. This allows us to exclude a
partition table whose ancestor is published by the same publication list.
This problem does exist in back-branches but we decide to fix it there in
a separate commit if required. The fix for back-branches requires quite
complicated changes to fetch the required table information from the
publisher as we can't update the function pg_get_publication_tables() in
back-branches. We are not sure whether we want to deviate and complicate
the code in back-branches for this problem as there are no field reports
yet.
Author: Wang wei
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Jacob Champion, Kuroda Hayato, Vignesh C, Osumi Takamichi, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB57167F45D481F78CDC5986F794B99@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Commit ecb696527c added an XML ID attribute to one varlistentry in
create_subscription.sgml. Following 78ee60ed84, this commit adds XML ID
attributes to all varlistentries in create_subscription.sgml.
Additionally, links are added to refer to the subscription options,
enhancing the readability of documents.
Author: Kuroda Hayato
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB58667AE04D291924671E2051F5879@TYAPR01MB5866.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
For ICU collations, ensure that the locale's language exists in ICU,
and that the locale can be opened.
Basic validation helps avoid minor mistakes and misspellings, which
often fall back to the root locale instead of the intended
locale. It's even more important to avoid such mistakes in ICU
versions 54 and earlier, where the same (misspelled) locale string
could fall back to different locales depending on the environment.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/11b1eeb7e7667fdd4178497aeb796c48d26e69b9.camel@j-davis.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/df2efad0cae7c65180df8e5ebb709e5eb4f2a82b.camel@j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Change the columns attndims, attstattarget, and attinhcount from int32
to int16, and reorder a bit. This saves some space (currently 4
bytes) in pg_attribute and tuple descriptors, which translates into
small performance benefits and/or room for new columns in pg_attribute
needed by future features.
attndims and attinhcount are never realistically used with values
larger than int16. Just to be sure, add some overflow checks.
attstattarget is currently limited explicitly to 10000.
For consistency, pg_constraint.coninhcount is also changed like
attinhcount.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d07ffc2b-e0e8-77f7-38fb-be921dff71af%40enterprisedb.com
Commit 4c8d65408 incorrectly stated that Homebrew has changed its
prefix for Apple M1 machines, but the prefix change applies to all
Apple Silicon based machines. Fix by writing Apple Silicon instead
of Apple M1.
Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87mt3ys8ng.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
Replace the hardcoded value with a GUC such that the iteration
count can be raised in order to increase protection against
brute-force attacks. The hardcoded value for SCRAM iteration
count was defined to be 4096, which is taken from RFC 7677, so
set the default for the GUC to 4096 to match. In RFC 7677 the
recommendation is at least 15000 iterations but 4096 is listed
as a SHOULD requirement given that it's estimated to yield a
0.5s processing time on a mobile handset of the time of RFC
writing (late 2015).
Raising the iteration count of SCRAM will make stored passwords
more resilient to brute-force attacks at a higher computational
cost during connection establishment. Lowering the count will
reduce computational overhead during connections at the tradeoff
of reducing strength against brute-force attacks.
There are however platforms where even a modest iteration count
yields a too high computational overhead, with weaker password
encryption schemes chosen as a result. In these situations,
SCRAM with a very low iteration count still gives benefits over
weaker schemes like md5, so we allow the iteration count to be
set to one at the low end.
The new GUC is intentionally generically named such that it can
be made to support future SCRAM standards should they emerge.
At that point the value can be made into key:value pairs with
an undefined key as a default which will be backwards compatible
with this.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jkatz@postgresql.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/F72E7BC7-189F-4B17-BF47-9735EB72C364@yesql.se
Word-smith section 22.1 ("Database Roles") a little bit in hopes
of removing confusion about how the bootstrap superuser's name
is chosen.
While here, I couldn't help noticing that the claim that the bootstrap
superuser is the only initially-existing role has been a lie since
we started to invent predefined roles. We don't want too much detail
in this very introductory text, but it seems worth changing it to say
that it's the only initially-existing login-capable role.
Per documentation comment from Maja Zaloznik.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/167931662853.3349090.18217722739345182859@wrigleys.postgresql.org
The "partitions_total" and "partitions_done" fields were updated
as though the current level of partitioning was the only one.
In multi-level cases, not only could partitions_total change
over the course of the command, but partitions_done could go
backwards or exceed the currently-reported partitions_total.
Fix by setting partitions_total to the total number of direct
and indirect children once at command start, and then just
incrementing partitions_done at appropriate points. Invent
a new progress monitoring function "pgstat_progress_incr_param"
to simplify doing the latter. We can avoid adding cost for the
former when doing CREATE INDEX, because ProcessUtility already
enumerates the children and it's pretty easy to pass the count
down to DefineIndex. In principle the same could be done in
ALTER TABLE, but that's structurally difficult; for now, just
eat the cost of an extra find_all_inheritors scan in that case.
Ilya Gladyshev and Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a15f904a70924ffa4ca25c3c744cff31e0e6e143.camel@gmail.com
These were causing "contents ... exceed the available area"
warnings in PDF builds, and also didn't quite follow our markup
conventions for function examples. To fix the overwidth
problem, reduce the number of fields shown in one example,
and also insert &zwsp; to let the header line be broken in
a reasonable place.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230324194701.dqkzcdtlcikseo22@awork3.anarazel.de
This provides a very simple way to see the generic plan for a
parameterized query. Without this, it's necessary to define
a prepared statement and temporarily change plan_cache_mode,
which is a bit tedious.
One thing that's a bit of a hack perhaps is that we disable
execution-time partition pruning when the GENERIC_PLAN option
is given. That's because the pruning code may attempt to
fetch the value of one of the parameters, which would fail.
Laurenz Albe, reviewed by Julien Rouhaud, Christoph Berg,
Michel Pelletier, Jim Jones, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0a29b954b10b57f0d135fe12aa0909bd41883eb0.camel@cybertec.at
The sslcertmode option controls whether the server is allowed and/or
required to request a certificate from the client. There are three
modes:
- "allow" is the default and follows the current behavior, where a
configured client certificate is sent if the server requests one
(via one of its default locations or sslcert). With the current
implementation, will happen whenever TLS is negotiated.
- "disable" causes the client to refuse to send a client certificate
even if sslcert is configured or if a client certificate is available in
one of its default locations.
- "require" causes the client to fail if a client certificate is never
sent and the server opens a connection anyway. This doesn't add any
additional security, since there is no guarantee that the server is
validating the certificate correctly, but it may helpful to troubleshoot
more complicated TLS setups.
sslcertmode=require requires SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb(), available since
OpenSSL 1.0.2. Note that LibreSSL does not include it.
Using a connection parameter different than require_auth has come up as
the simplest design because certificate authentication does not rely
directly on any of the AUTH_REQ_* codes, and one may want to require a
certificate to be sent in combination of a given authentication method,
like SCRAM-SHA-256.
TAP tests are added in src/test/ssl/, some of them relying on sslinfo to
check if a certificate has been set. These are compatible across all
the versions of OpenSSL supported on HEAD (currently down to 1.0.1).
Author: Jacob Champion
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Peter Eisentraut, David G. Johnston,
Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9e5a8ccddb8355ea9fa4b75a1e3a9edc88a70cd3.camel@vmware.com
Add pgstat counter to track row updates that result in the successor
version going to a new heap page, leaving behind an original version
whose t_ctid points to the new version. The current count is shown by
the n_tup_newpage_upd column of each of the pg_stat_*_tables views.
The new n_tup_newpage_upd column complements the existing n_tup_hot_upd
and n_tup_upd columns. Tables that have high n_tup_newpage_upd values
(relative to n_tup_upd) are good candidates for tuning heap fillfactor.
Corey Huinker, with small tweaks by me.
Author: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=ded21M9iZ36hHm-vj2rE2d=zcKpUQMds__Xm2pxLfHKA@mail.gmail.com
This patch allows copying tables in the binary format during table
synchronization when the binary option for a subscription is enabled.
Previously, tables are copied in text format even if the subscription is
created with the binary option enabled. Copying tables in binary format
may reduce the time spent depending on column types.
A binary copy for initial table synchronization is supported only when
both publisher and subscriber are v16 or later.
Author: Melih Mutlu
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Shi yu, Euler Taveira, Vignesh C, Kuroda Hayato, Osumi Takamichi, Bharath Rupireddy, Hou Zhijie
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGPVpCQvAziCLknEnygY0v1-KBtg%2BOm-9JHJYZOnNPKFJPompw%40mail.gmail.com
* Commit 3048898e dropped -ING from PHJ wait event names. Update the
corresponding barrier phases names to match.
* Rename the "DONE" phases to "FREE". That's symmetrical with
"ALLOCATE", and names the activity that actually happens in that phase
(as we do for the other phases) rather than a state. The bug fixed by
commit 8d578b9b might have been more obvious with this name.
* Rename the batch/bucket growth barriers' "ALLOCATE" phases to
"REALLOCATE", a better description of what they do.
* Update the high level comments about phases to highlight phases
are executed by a single process with an asterisk (mostly memory
management phases).
No behavior change, as this is just improving internal identifiers. The
only user-visible sign of this is that a couple of wait events' display
names change from "...Allocate" to "...Reallocate" in pg_stat_activity,
to stay in sync with the internal names.
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BMDpwF2Eo2LAvzd%3DpOh81wUTsrwU1uAwR-v6OGBB6%2B7g%40mail.gmail.com
This option, or its long form --set, sets the GUC "name" to "value".
The setting applies in the bootstrap and standalone servers run by
initdb, and is also written into the generated postgresql.conf.
This can save an extra editing step when creating a new cluster,
but the real use-case is for coping with situations where the
bootstrap server fails to start due to environmental issues;
for example, if it's necessary to force huge_pages to off.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2844176.1674681919@sss.pgh.pa.us
This commit adds some documentation about two monitoring functions:
- pg_stat_get_xact_blocks_fetched()
- pg_stat_get_xact_blocks_hit()
The description of these functions has been removed in ddfc2d9, later
simplified by 5f2b089, assuming that all the functions whose
descriptions were removed are used in system views. Unfortunately, some
of them were are not used in any system views, so they lacked
documentation.
This gap exists in the docs for a long time, so backpatch all the way
down.
Reported-by: Michael Paquier
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZBeeH5UoNkTPrwHO@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 11
These are set after a \! command or a backtick substitution.
SHELL_ERROR is just "true" for error (nonzero exit status) or "false"
for success, while SHELL_EXIT_CODE records the actual exit status
following standard shell/system(3) conventions.
Corey Huinker, reviewed by Maxim Orlov and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=cWao2x2f+UDw15W1JkVFr_bsxfstw=NGea7r9m4j-7rQ@mail.gmail.com
This makes it easier to specify values taken directly from WAL file
names.
The option parsing is arranged in the style of option_parse_int() (but
we need to parse unsigned int), to allow future refactoring in the
same manner.
Reviewed-by: Sébastien Lardière <sebastien@lardiere.net>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/8fef346e-2541-76c3-d768-6536ae052993@lardiere.net
@extschema:name@ extends the existing @extschema@ feature so that
we can also insert the schema name of some required extension,
thus making cross-extension references robust even if they are in
different schemas.
However, this has the same hazard as @extschema@: if the schema
name is embedded literally in an installed object, rather than being
looked up once during extension script execution, then it's no longer
safe to relocate the other extension to another schema. To deal with
that without restricting things unnecessarily, add a "no_relocate"
option to extension control files. This allows an extension to
specify that it cannot handle relocation of some of its required
extensions, even if in themselves those extensions are relocatable.
We detect "no_relocate" requests of dependent extensions during
ALTER EXTENSION SET SCHEMA.
Regina Obe, reviewed by Sandro Santilli and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/003001d8f4ae$402282c0$c0678840$@pcorp.us
When determining whether an index update may be skipped by using HOT, we
can ignore attributes indexed by block summarizing indexes without
references to individual tuples that need to be cleaned up.
A new type TU_UpdateIndexes provides a signal to the executor to
determine which indexes to update - no indexes, all indexes, or only the
summarizing indexes.
This also removes rd_indexattr list, and replaces it with rd_attrsvalid
flag. The list was not used anywhere, and a simple flag is sufficient.
This was originally committed as 5753d4ee32, but then got reverted by
e3fcca0d0d because of correctness issues.
Original patch by Josef Simanek, various fixes and improvements by Tomas
Vondra and me.
Authors: Matthias van de Meent, Josef Simanek, Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/05ebcb44-f383-86e3-4f31-0a97a55634cf@enterprisedb.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFp7QwpMRGcDAQumN7onN9HjrJ3u4X3ZRXdGFT0K5G2JWvnbWg%40mail.gmail.com
Add versions of timestamptz + interval, timestamptz - interval, and
generate_series(timestamptz, ...) in which a timezone can be specified
explicitly instead of defaulting to the TimeZone GUC setting.
The new functions for the first two are named date_add and
date_subtract. This might seem too generic, but we could use
overloading to add additional variants if that seems useful.
Along the way, improve the docs' pretty inadequate explanation
of how timestamptz +- interval works.
Przemysław Sztoch and Gurjeet Singh; cosmetic changes and most of
the docs work by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/01a84551-48dd-1359-bf7e-f6b0203a6bd0@sztoch.pl
Hash partitioning on an enum is problematic because the hash codes are
derived from the OIDs assigned to the enum values, which will almost
certainly be different after a dump-and-reload than they were before.
This means that some rows probably end up in different partitions than
before, causing restore to fail because of partition constraint
violations. (pg_upgrade dodges this problem by using hacks to force
the enum values to keep the same OIDs, but that's not possible nor
desirable for pg_dump.)
Users can work around that by specifying --load-via-partition-root,
but since that's a dump-time not restore-time decision, one might
find out the need for it far too late. Instead, teach pg_dump to
apply that option automatically when dealing with a partitioned
table that has hash-on-enum partitioning.
Also deal with a pre-existing issue for --load-via-partition-root
mode: in a parallel restore, we try to TRUNCATE target tables just
before loading them, in order to enable some backend optimizations.
This is bad when using --load-via-partition-root because (a) we're
likely to suffer deadlocks from restore jobs trying to restore rows
into other partitions than they came from, and (b) if we miss getting
a deadlock we might still lose data due to a TRUNCATE removing rows
from some already-completed restore job.
The fix for this is conceptually simple: just don't TRUNCATE if we're
dealing with a --load-via-partition-root case. The tricky bit is for
pg_restore to identify those cases. In dumps using COPY commands we
can inspect each COPY command to see if it targets the nominal target
table or some ancestor. However, in dumps using INSERT commands it's
pretty impractical to examine the INSERTs in advance. To provide a
solution for that going forward, modify pg_dump to mark TABLE DATA
items that are using --load-via-partition-root with a comment.
(This change also responds to a complaint from Robert Haas that
the dump output for --load-via-partition-root is pretty confusing.)
pg_restore checks for the special comment as well as checking the
COPY command if present. This will fail to identify the combination
of --load-via-partition-root and --inserts in pre-existing dump files,
but that should be a pretty rare case in the field. If it does
happen you will probably get a deadlock failure that you can work
around by not using parallel restore, which is the same as before
this bug fix.
Having done this, there seems no remaining reason for the alarmism
in the pg_dump man page about combining --load-via-partition-root
with parallel restore, so remove that warning.
Patch by me; thanks to Julien Rouhaud for review. Back-patch to
v11 where hash partitioning was introduced.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1376149.1675268279@sss.pgh.pa.us
Support for SCM credential authentication has been removed in the
backend in 9.1, and libpq has kept some code to handle it for
compatibility.
Commit be4585b, that did the cleanup of the backend code, has done
so because the code was not really portable originally. And, as there
are likely little chances that this is used these days, this removes the
remaining code from libpq. An error will now be raised by libpq if
attempting to connect to a server that returns AUTH_REQ_SCM_CREDS,
instead.
References to SCM credential authentication are removed from the
protocol documentation. This removes some meson and configure checks.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZBLH8a4otfqgd6Kn@paquier.xyz
Clarify that ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION can be used to perform partition
maintenance with less locking than straight CREATE TABLE/DROP TABLE.
This was already stated in some places, but not emphasized.
Back-patch to v14 where DETACH PARTITION CONCURRENTLY was added.
(We had lower lock levels for ATTACH PARTITION before that, but
this wording wouldn't apply.)
Justin Pryzby, reviewed by Robert Treat and Jakub Wartak;
a little further wordsmithing by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220718143304.GC18011@telsasoft.com
This adds the ability to pretty-print XML documents ... according to
libxml's somewhat idiosyncratic notions of what's pretty, anyway.
One notable divergence from a strict reading of the spec is that
libxml is willing to collapse empty nodes "<node></node>" to just
"<node/>", whereas SQL and the underlying XML spec say that this
option should only result in whitespace tweaks. Nonetheless,
it seems close enough to justify using the SQL-standard syntax.
Jim Jones, reviewed by Peter Smith and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2f5df461-dad8-6d7d-4568-08e10608a69b@uni-muenster.de
Using REPLICA IDENTITY FULL on the publisher can lead to a full table scan
per tuple change on the subscription when REPLICA IDENTITY or PK index is
not available. This makes REPLICA IDENTITY FULL impractical to use apart
from some small number of use cases.
This patch allows using indexes other than PRIMARY KEY or REPLICA
IDENTITY on the subscriber during apply of update/delete. The index that
can be used must be a btree index, not a partial index, and it must have
at least one column reference (i.e. cannot consist of only expressions).
We can uplift these restrictions in the future. There is no smart
mechanism to pick the index. If there is more than one index that
satisfies these requirements, we just pick the first one. We discussed
using some of the optimizer's low-level APIs for this but ruled it out
as that can be a maintenance burden in the long run.
This patch improves the performance in the vast majority of cases and the
improvement is proportional to the amount of data in the table. However,
there could be some regression in a small number of cases where the indexes
have a lot of duplicate and dead rows. It was discussed that those are
mostly impractical cases but we can provide a table or subscription level
option to disable this feature if required.
Author: Onder Kalaci, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Shi yu, Hou Zhijie, Vignesh C, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACawEhVLqmAAyPXdHEPv1ssU2c=dqOniiGz7G73HfyS7+nGV4w@mail.gmail.com
This patch adds new pg_dump switches
--table-and-children=pattern
--exclude-table-and-children=pattern
--exclude-table-data-and-children=pattern
which act the same as the existing --table, --exclude-table, and
--exclude-table-data switches, except that any partitions or
inheritance child tables of the table(s) matching the pattern
are also included or excluded.
Gilles Darold, reviewed by Stéphane Tachoires
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5aa393b5-5f67-8447-b83e-544516990ee2@migops.com
Use PostgreSQL consistently for referring to the productname rather
than Postgres. This also adds <productname> markup.
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: "Jonathan S. Katz" <jkatz@postgresql.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9C019644-9EA4-4B79-A52C-5C47A5B6B2DF@yesql.se
This commit reworks a bit the set-returning functions of pg_walinspect,
making them more flexible regarding their end LSN:
- pg_get_wal_records_info()
- pg_get_wal_stats()
- pg_get_wal_block_info()
The end LSNs given to these functions is now handled so as a value
higher than the current LSN of the cluster (insert LSN for a primary, or
replay LSN for a standby) does not raise an error, giving more
flexibility to monitoring queries. Instead, the functions return
results up to the current LSN, as found at the beginning of each
function call.
As an effect of that, pg_get_wal_records_info_till_end_of_wal() and
pg_get_wal_stats_till_end_of_wal() are now removed from 1.1, as the
existing, equivalent functions are able to offer the same
possibilities.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACU0_q-o4DSweyaW9NO1KBx-QkN6G_OzYQvpjf3CZVASkg@mail.gmail.com
Expose the standard error functions as SQL-callable functions. These
are expected to be useful to people working with normal distributions,
and we use them here to test the distribution from random_normal().
Since these functions are defined in the POSIX and C99 standards, they
should in theory be available on all supported platforms. If that
turns out not to be the case, more work will be needed.
On all platforms tested so far, using extra_float_digits = -1 in the
regression tests is sufficient to allow for variations between
implementations. However, past experience has shown that there are
almost certainly going to be additional unexpected portability issues,
so these tests may well need further adjustments, based on the
buildfarm results.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Nathan Bossart and Thomas Munro.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCXv5fi7+Vu-POiyai+ucF95+YMcCMafxV+eZuN1B-=MkQ@mail.gmail.com
The new connection parameter require_auth allows a libpq client to
define a list of comma-separated acceptable authentication types for use
with the server. There is no negotiation: if the server does not
present one of the allowed authentication requests, the connection
attempt done by the client fails.
The following keywords can be defined in the list:
- password, for AUTH_REQ_PASSWORD.
- md5, for AUTH_REQ_MD5.
- gss, for AUTH_REQ_GSS[_CONT].
- sspi, for AUTH_REQ_SSPI and AUTH_REQ_GSS_CONT.
- scram-sha-256, for AUTH_REQ_SASL[_CONT|_FIN].
- creds, for AUTH_REQ_SCM_CREDS (perhaps this should be removed entirely
now).
- none, to control unauthenticated connections.
All the methods that can be defined in the list can be negated, like
"!password", in which case the server must NOT use the listed
authentication type. The special method "none" allows/disallows the use
of unauthenticated connections (but it does not govern transport-level
authentication via TLS or GSSAPI).
Internally, the patch logic is tied to check_expected_areq(), that was
used for channel_binding, ensuring that an incoming request is
compatible with conn->require_auth. It also introduces a new flag,
conn->client_finished_auth, which is set by various authentication
routines when the client side of the handshake is finished. This
signals to check_expected_areq() that an AUTH_REQ_OK from the server is
expected, and allows the client to complain if the server bypasses
authentication entirely, with for example the reception of a too-early
AUTH_REQ_OK message.
Regression tests are added in authentication TAP tests for all the
keywords supported (except "creds", because it is around only for
compatibility reasons). A new TAP script has been added for SSPI, as
there was no script dedicated to it yet. It relies on SSPI being the
default authentication method on Windows, as set by pg_regress.
Author: Jacob Champion
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, David G. Johnston, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9e5a8ccddb8355ea9fa4b75a1e3a9edc88a70cd3.camel@vmware.com
This allows for a string which if an input field matches causes the
column's default value to be inserted. The advantage of this is that
the default can be inserted in some rows and not others, for which
non-default data is available.
The file_fdw extension is also modified to take allow use of this
option.
Israel Barth Rubio
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAO_rXXAcqesk6DsvioOZ5zmeEmpUN5ktZf-9=9yu+DTr0Xr8Uw@mail.gmail.com
The 'ssl' option is of type 'combo', but we add a choice 'auto' that
simulates the behavior of a feature option. This way, openssl is used
automatically by default if present, but we retain the ability to
potentially select another ssl library.
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/ad65ffd1-a9a7-fda1-59c6-f7dc763c3051%40enterprisedb.com
Previously, the default encoding was derived from the locale when
using libc; while the default was always UTF-8 when using ICU. That
would throw an error when the locale was not compatible with UTF-8.
This commit causes initdb to derive the default encoding from the
locale for both providers. If --no-locale is specified (or if the
locale is C or POSIX), the default encoding will be UTF-8 for ICU
(because ICU does not support SQL_ASCII) and SQL_ASCII for libc.
Per buildfarm failure on system "hoverfly" related to commit
27b62377b4.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d191d5841347301a8f1238f609471ddd957fc47e.camel%40j-davis.com
This commit reworks pg_get_wal_fpi_info() to become aware of all the
block information that can be attached to a record rather than just its
full-page writes:
- Addition of the block id as assigned by XLogRegisterBuffer(),
XLogRegisterBlock() or XLogRegisterBufData().
- Addition of the block data, as bytea, or NULL if none. The length of
the block data can be guessed with length(), so there is no need to
store its length in a separate field.
- Addition of the full-page image length, as counted without a hole or
even compressed.
- Modification of the handling of the full-page image data. This is
still a bytea, but it could become NULL if none is assigned to a block.
- Addition of the full-page image flags, tracking if a page is stored
with a hole, if it needs to be applied and the type of compression
applied to it, as of all the BKPIMAGE_* values in xlogrecord.h.
The information of each block is returned as one single record, with the
record's ReadRecPtr included to be able to join the block information
with the existing pg_get_wal_records_info(). Note that it is perfectly
possible for a block to hold both data and full-page image.
Thanks also to Kyotaro Horiguchi and Matthias van de Meent for the
discussion.
This commit uses some of the work proposed by Melanie, though it has
been largely redesigned and rewritten by me. Bharath has helped in
refining a bit the whole.
Reported-by: Melanie Plageman
Author: Michael Paquier, Melanie Plageman, Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_bORebdZmcV8V4cZBzU8M_C6tDDdbiPhCZ6i-iuSXW9TA@mail.gmail.com
This exposes the ICU facility to add custom collation rules to a
standard collation.
New options are added to CREATE COLLATION, CREATE DATABASE, createdb,
and initdb to set the rules.
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/821c71a4-6ef0-d366-9acf-bb8e367f739f@enterprisedb.com
Add description of which one is the default between two complementary
options of --bypassrls and --replication in the help text and docs. In
correspondence let the command always include the tokens corresponding
to every options of that kind in the SQL command sent to server. Tests
are updated accordingly.
Also fix the checks of some trivalue vars which were using literal zero
for checking default value instead of the enum label TRI_DEFAULT. While
not a bug, since TRI_DEFAULT is defined as zero, fixing improves read-
ability improved readability (and avoid bugs if the enum is changed).
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220810.151243.1073197628358749087.horikyota.ntt@gmail.com
Disabling this option is useful to run VACUUM (with or without FULL) on
only the toast table of a relation, bypassing the main relation. This
option is enabled by default.
Running directly VACUUM on a toast table was already possible without
this feature, by using the non-deterministic name of a toast relation
(as of pg_toast.pg_toast_N, where N would be the OID of the parent
relation) in the VACUUM command, and it required a scan of pg_class to
know the name of the toast table. So this feature is basically a
shortcut to be able to run VACUUM or VACUUM FULL on a toast relation,
using only the name of the parent relation.
A new switch called --no-process-main is added to vacuumdb, to work as
an equivalent of PROCESS_MAIN.
Regression tests are added to cover VACUUM and VACUUM FULL, looking at
pg_stat_all_tables.vacuum_count to see how many vacuums have run on
each table, main or toast.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221230000028.GA435655@nathanxps13
Add support for non-decimal integer literals and underscores in
numeric literals to SQL JSON path language. This follows the rules of
ECMAScript, as referred to by the SQL standard.
Internally, all the numeric literal parsing of jsonpath goes through
numeric_in, which already supports all this, so this patch is just a
bit of lexer work and some tests and documentation.
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/b11b25bb-6ec1-d42f-cedd-311eae59e1fb@enterprisedb.com
Beginning in v15, if you apply ALTER TABLE ENABLE/DISABLE TRIGGER to
a partitioned table, it also affects the partitions' cloned versions
of the affected trigger(s). The initial implementation of this
located the clones by name, but that fails on foreign-key triggers
which have names incorporating their own OIDs. We can fix that, and
also make the behavior more bulletproof in the face of user-initiated
trigger renames, by identifying the cloned triggers by tgparentid.
Following the lead of earlier commits in this area, I took care not
to break ABI in the v15 branch, even though I rather doubt there
are any external callers of EnableDisableTrigger.
While here, update the documentation, which was not touched when
the semantics were changed.
Per bug #17817 from Alan Hodgson. Back-patch to v15; older versions
do not have this behavior.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17817-31dfb7c2100d9f3d@postgresql.org
Our previous habit of showing the full function body is really
pretty unfriendly for tabular viewing of functions, and now that
we have \sf and \ef commands there seems no good reason why \df+
has to do it. It still seems to make sense to show prosrc for
internal and C-language functions, since in those cases prosrc
is just the C function name; but then let's rename the column to
"Internal name" which is a more accurate descriptor.
Isaac Morland
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMsGm5eqKc6J1=Lwn=ZONG=6ZDYWRQ4cgZQLqMuZGB1aVt_JBg@mail.gmail.com
The current implementation of query normalization in pg_stat_statements
is optimistic. If an entry is deallocated between the post-analyze hook
and the planner and/or execution hook, it can be possible to find query
strings with literal constant values (like "SELECT 1, 2") rather than
their normalized flavor (like "SELECT $1, $2").
This commit adds in the documentation a paragraph about this limitation,
and that this risk can be reduced by increasing pg_stat_statements.max,
particularly if pg_stat_statements_info reports a high number of
deallocations.
Author: Sami Imseih
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9CFF3512-355B-4676-8CCC-6CF622F4DC1A@amazon.com
Since 3db72eb, the calculation of the query ID hash for utilities is not
done based on the textual query strings, but on their internal Query
representation, meaning that there can be an overlap when they use
literal constants. The documentation of pg_stat_statements was missing
a refresh about that.
Extracted from a larger patch by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y+MRdEq9W9XVa2AB@paquier.xyz
pg_input_error_info() is now a SQL function able to return a row with
more than just the error message generated for incorrect data type
inputs when these are able to handle soft failures, returning more
contents of ErrorData, as of:
- The error message (same as before).
- The error detail, if set.
- The error hint, if set.
- SQL error code.
All the regression tests that relied on pg_input_error_message() are
updated to reflect the effects of the rename.
Per discussion with Tom Lane and Andrew Dunstan.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/139a68e1-bd1f-a9a7-b5fe-0be9845c6311@dunslane.net
Expand pg_dump's compression streaming and file APIs to support the lz4
algorithm. The newly added compress_lz4.{c,h} files cover all the
functionality of the aforementioned APIs. Minor changes were necessary
in various pg_backup_* files, where code for the 'lz4' file suffix has
been added, as well as pg_dump's compression option parsing.
Author: Georgios Kokolatos
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Rachel Heaton, Justin Pryzby, Shi Yu, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/faUNEOpts9vunEaLnmxmG-DldLSg_ql137OC3JYDmgrOMHm1RvvWY2IdBkv_CRxm5spCCb_OmKNk2T03TMm0fBEWveFF9wA1WizPuAgB7Ss%3D%40protonmail.com
SQL:2023 defines an ANY_VALUE aggregate whose purpose is to emit an
implementation-dependent (i.e. non-deterministic) value from the
aggregated rows.
Author: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5cff866c-10a8-d2df-32cb-e9072e6b04a2@postgresfriends.org
The -Dcassert and -Db_coverage that can be specified to a meson command
require values after an equal sign but the documentation did not
properly reflect that. All the other options specify the argument
values they expect, so close the gap.
Author: Jelte Fennema
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQRXd1z+AoQ4tC5tqPk1_NQJohf6xwdEL=z9KgxHau2maQ@mail.gmail.com
A new callback named startup_cb, called shortly after a module is
loaded, is added. This makes possible the initialization of any
additional state data required by a module. This initial state data can
be saved in a ArchiveModuleState, that is now passed down to all the
callbacks that can be defined in a module. With this design, it is
possible to have a per-module state, aimed at opening the door to the
support of more than one archive module.
The initialization of the callbacks is changed so as
_PG_archive_module_init() does not anymore give in input a
ArchiveModuleCallbacks that a module has to fill in with callback
definitions. Instead, a module now needs to return a const
ArchiveModuleCallbacks.
All the structure and callback definitions of archive modules are moved
into their own header, named archive_module.h, from pgarch.h.
Command-based archiving follows the same line, with a new set of files
named shell_archive.{c,h}.
There are a few more items that are under discussion to improve the
design of archive modules, like the fact that basic_archive calls
sigsetjmp() by itself to define its own error handling flow. These will
be adjusted later, the changes done here cover already a good portion
of what has been discussed.
Any modules created for v15 will need to be adjusted to this new
design.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230130194810.6fztfgbn32e7qarj@awork3.anarazel.de
d9d7fe68d3 made use of an existing wait event when sending data from the
apply worker, but we should have invented a new wait event since this is a
new place to wait.
This patch corrects the mistake by using a new wait event
"LogicalApplySendData".
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobWzbr9H3yN3dLVckviEZKemPwd+XyCFKEgyZQZhgP66Q@mail.gmail.com
force_parallel_mode is meant to be used to allow us to exercise the
parallel query infrastructure to ensure that it's working as we expect.
It seems some users think this GUC is for forcing the query planner into
picking a parallel plan regardless of the costs. A quick look at the
documentation would have made them realize that they were wrong, but the
GUC is likely too conveniently named which, evidently, seems to often
result in users expecting that it forces the planner into usefully
parallelizing queries.
Here we rename the GUC to something which casual users are less likely to
mistakenly think is what they need to make their query run more quickly.
For now, the old name can still be used. We'll revisit if the old name
mapping can be removed once the buildfarm configs are all updated.
Reviewed-by: John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrsOi92_uA7PEaHZMH-S4Xv+MGhQWA+GrP8b1kjpS1HjQ@mail.gmail.com
If the locale provider is not specified, it defaults to be the same as
the template from which it was created. Previously, the documentation
said the default was libc.
Also adjust wording of CREATE DATABASE and CREATE COLLATION docs to be
definite that there are exactly two possible collation providers.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6befdaada61c046b67f3b269f7fa6f069a35803e.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Builds on 28e626bde0 and f30d62c2fc. See the former for motivation.
Rows of the view show IO operations for a particular backend type, IO target
object, IO context combination (e.g. a client backend's operations on
permanent relations in shared buffers) and each column in the view is the
total number of IO Operations done (e.g. writes). So a cell in the view would
be, for example, the number of blocks of relation data written from shared
buffers by client backends since the last stats reset.
In anticipation of tracking WAL IO and non-block-oriented IO (such as
temporary file IO), the "op_bytes" column specifies the unit of the "reads",
"writes", and "extends" columns for a given row.
Rows for combinations of IO operation, backend type, target object and context
that never occur, are ommitted entirely. For example, checkpointer will never
operate on temporary relations.
Similarly, if an IO operation never occurs for such a combination, the IO
operation's cell will be null, to distinguish from 0 observed IO
operations. For example, bgwriter should not perform reads.
Note that some of the cells in the view are redundant with fields in
pg_stat_bgwriter (e.g. buffers_backend). For now, these have been kept for
backwards compatibility.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Author: Samay Sharma <smilingsamay@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Maciek Sakrejda <m.sakrejda@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Lukas Fittl <lukas@fittl.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
This commit adds the infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics. The calls
to actually count IOs, a system view to access the new statistics,
documentation and tests will be added in subsequent commits, to make review
easier.
While we already had some IO statistics, e.g. in pg_stat_bgwriter and
pg_stat_database, they did not provide sufficient detail to understand what
the main sources of IO are, or whether configuration changes could avoid
IO. E.g., pg_stat_bgwriter.buffers_backend does contain the number of buffers
written out by a backend, but as that includes extending relations (always
done by backends) and writes triggered by the use of buffer access strategies,
it cannot easily be used to tune background writer or checkpointer. Similarly,
pg_stat_database.blks_read cannot easily be used to tune shared_buffers /
compute a cache hit ratio, as the use of buffer access strategies will often
prevent a large fraction of the read blocks to end up in shared_buffers.
The new IO statistics count IO operations (evict, extend, fsync, read, reuse,
and write), and are aggregated for each combination of backend type (backend,
autovacuum worker, bgwriter, etc), target object of the IO (relations, temp
relations) and context of the IO (normal, vacuum, bulkread, bulkwrite).
What is tracked in this series of patches, is sufficient to perform the
aforementioned analyses. Further details, e.g. tracking the number of buffer
hits, would make that even easier, but was left out for now, to keep the scope
of the already large patchset manageable.
Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
It appears no longer possible to build the SGML docs without a local
installation of the DocBook DTD, because sourceforge.net now only
permits HTTPS access, and no common version of xsltproc supports that.
Hence, remove the bits of our documentation suggesting that that's
possible or useful.
In fact, we might as well add the --nonet option to the build recipes
automatically, for a bit of extra security.
Also fix our documentation-tool-installation recipes for macOS to
ensure that xmllint and xsltproc are pulled in from MacPorts or
Homebrew. The previous recipes assumed you could use the
Apple-supplied versions of these tools; which still works, except that
you'd need to set an environment variable to ensure that they would
find DTD files provided by those package managers. Simpler and easier
to just recommend pulling in the additional packages.
In HEAD, also document how to build docs using Meson, and adjust
"ninja docs" to just build the HTML docs, for consistency with the
default behavior of doc/src/sgml/Makefile.
In a fit of neatnik-ism, I also made the ordering of the package
lists match the order in which the tools are described at the head
of the appendix.
Aleksander Alekseev, Peter Eisentraut, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TO8Aro2nxg=EQsVGiSDe-TstP4EsSvDHd7DSRsP40PgGA@mail.gmail.com
The splitting into parts actually started earlier than the text had
claimed, but that is ancient history anyway by now and does not need
to be mentioned. Update that and tweak the text a bit.
This adds a new option to pg_verifybackup called -P/--progress, showing
every second some information about the progress of the checksum
verification based on the data of a backup manifest.
Similarly to what is done for pg_rewind and pg_basebackup, the
information printed in the progress report consists of the current
amount of data computed and the total amount of data that will be
computed. Note that files found with an incorrect size do not have
their checksum verified, hence their size is not appended to the total
amount of data estimated during the first scan of the manifest data
(such incorrect sizes could be overly high, for one, falsifying the
progress report).
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoC5+JOgMd4o3z_oxw0f8JDSsCYY7zSbhe-O9x7f33rw_A@mail.gmail.com
This allows underscores to be used in integer and numeric literals,
and their corresponding type input functions, for visual grouping.
For example:
1_500_000_000
3.14159_26535_89793
0xffff_ffff
0b_1001_0001
A single underscore is allowed between any 2 digits, or immediately
after the base prefix indicator of non-decimal integers, per SQL:202x
draft.
Peter Eisentraut and Dean Rasheed
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/84aae844-dc55-a4be-86d9-4f0fa405cc97%40enterprisedb.com
Breaking <phrase> over two lines is not handled by psql's
create_help.pl. (It creates faulty \help output.)
Undo the formatting change introduced by
9bdad1b515 to fix this for now.
An early release of AF_UNIX in Windows apparently supported Linux-style
"abstract" Unix sockets, but they do not seem to work in current Windows
versions and there is no mention of any of this in the Winsock
documentation. Remove the mention of Windows from the documentation.
Back-patch to 14, where commit c9f0624b landed.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKrYbSZhrk4NGfoQGT_3LQS5pC5KNE1g0tvE_pPBZ7uew%40mail.gmail.com
Extend the existing developer option 'logical_replication_mode' to help
test the parallel apply of large transactions on the subscriber.
When set to 'buffered', the leader sends changes to parallel apply workers
via a shared memory queue. When set to 'immediate', the leader serializes
all changes to files and notifies the parallel apply workers to read and
apply them at the end of the transaction.
This helps in adding tests to cover the serialization code path in
parallel streaming mode.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Kuroda Hayato, Sawada Masahiko, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
This was only mentioned in the description of the text/label, which
are marked as being in quotes in the synopsis, which can cause
confusion (as witnessed on IRC).
Also separate the literal and NULL cases in the parameter list, per
suggestion from Tom Lane.
Also add an example of dropping a security label.
Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker, with some tweaks by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87sffqk4zp.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
Traditionally we used the same Var struct to represent the value
of a table column everywhere in parse and plan trees. This choice
predates our support for SQL outer joins, and it's really a pretty
bad idea with outer joins, because the Var's value can depend on
where it is in the tree: it might go to NULL above an outer join.
So expression nodes that are equal() per equalfuncs.c might not
represent the same value, which is a huge correctness hazard for
the planner.
To improve this, decorate Var nodes with a bitmapset showing
which outer joins (identified by RTE indexes) may have nulled
them at the point in the parse tree where the Var appears.
This allows us to trust that equal() Vars represent the same value.
A certain amount of klugery is still needed to cope with cases
where we re-order two outer joins, but it's possible to make it
work without sacrificing that core principle. PlaceHolderVars
receive similar decoration for the same reason.
In the planner, we include these outer join bitmapsets into the relids
that an expression is considered to depend on, and in consequence also
add outer-join relids to the relids of join RelOptInfos. This allows
us to correctly perceive whether an expression can be calculated above
or below a particular outer join.
This change affects FDWs that want to plan foreign joins. They *must*
follow suit when labeling foreign joins in order to match with the
core planner, but for many purposes (if postgres_fdw is any guide)
they'd prefer to consider only base relations within the join.
To support both requirements, redefine ForeignScan.fs_relids as
base+OJ relids, and add a new field fs_base_relids that's set up by
the core planner.
Large though it is, this commit just does the minimum necessary to
install the new mechanisms and get check-world passing again.
Follow-up patches will perform some cleanup. (The README additions
and comments mention some stuff that will appear in the follow-up.)
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/830269.1656693747@sss.pgh.pa.us
defGetBoolean() allows the "value" part of "option = value"
syntax to be omitted, in which case it's taken as "true".
This is acknowledged in our syntax summaries for relevant commands,
but we don't seem to have documented the actual behavior anywhere.
Do so for CREATE/ALTER PUBLICATION/SUBSCRIPTION. Use generic
boilerplate text for this, with the idea that we can copy-and-paste
it into other relevant reference pages, whenever someone gets
around to that.
Peter Smith, edited a bit by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PvwjZfdGt2R8HTXgSZft=jZKymrS8KUg31pS7zqaaWKKw@mail.gmail.com
Rename the developer option 'logical_decoding_mode' to the more flexible
name 'logical_replication_mode' because doing so will make it easier to
extend this option in the future to help test other areas of logical
replication.
Currently, it is used on the publisher side to allow streaming or
serializing each change in logical decoding. In the upcoming patch, we are
planning to use it on the subscriber. On the subscriber, it will allow
serializing the changes to file and notifies the parallel apply workers to
read and apply them at the end of the transaction.
We discussed exposing this parameter as a subscription option but
it did not seem advisable since it is primarily used for testing/debugging
and there is no other such parameter. We also discussed having separate
GUCs for publisher and subscriber but for current testing/debugging
requirements, one GUC is sufficient.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Kuroda Hayato, Sawada Masahiko, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAy2c=Mx=FTCs+EwUsf2kQL5MmU3N18X84k0EmCXntK4g@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
VACUUM VERBOSE/autovacuuming logging have reported on the number of
pages frozen by VACUUM since commit d977ffd9 added that capability.
This information is directly related to relfrozenxid advancement, so
update an older tip from the documentation about how relfrozenxid is
reported on by the same instrumentation code. Now the tip directly
mentions newly frozen pages, too.
Eager freezing strategy avoids large build-ups of all-visible pages. It
makes VACUUM trigger page-level freezing whenever doing so will enable
the page to become all-frozen in the visibility map. This is useful for
tables that experience continual growth, particularly strict append-only
tables such as pgbench's history table. Eager freezing significantly
improves performance stability by spreading out the cost of freezing
over time, rather than doing most freezing during aggressive VACUUMs.
It complements the insert autovacuum mechanism added by commit b07642db.
VACUUM determines its freezing strategy based on the value of the new
vacuum_freeze_strategy_threshold GUC (or reloption) with logged tables.
Tables that exceed the size threshold use the eager freezing strategy.
Unlogged tables and temp tables always use eager freezing strategy,
since the added cost is negligible there. Non-permanent relations won't
incur any extra overhead in WAL written (for the obvious reason), nor in
pages dirtied (since any extra freezing will only take place on pages
whose PD_ALL_VISIBLE bit needed to be set either way).
VACUUM uses lazy freezing strategy for logged tables that fall under the
GUC size threshold. Page-level freezing triggers based on the criteria
established in commit 1de58df4, which added basic page-level freezing.
Eager freezing is strictly more aggressive than lazy freezing. Settings
like vacuum_freeze_min_age still get applied in just the same way in
every VACUUM, independent of the strategy in use. The only mechanical
difference between eager and lazy freezing strategies is that only the
former applies its own additional criteria to trigger freezing pages.
Note that even lazy freezing strategy will trigger freezing whenever a
page happens to have required that an FPI be written during pruning,
provided that the page will thereby become all-frozen in the visibility
map afterwards (due to the FPI optimization from commit 1de58df4).
The vacuum_freeze_strategy_threshold default setting is 4GB. This is a
relatively low setting that prioritizes performance stability. It will
be reviewed at the end of the Postgres 16 beta period.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkFok_6EAHuK39GaW4FjEFQsY=3J0AAd6FXk93u-Xq3Fg@mail.gmail.com
network_ops is an opclass family of SpGiST, and the opclass able to
work on the inet type is named inet_ops.
Oversight in 7a1cd52, that reworked the design of the table listing all
the operators available.
Reported-by: Laurence Parry
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/167458110639.2667300.14741268666497110766@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 14
This rename is in preparation for the introduction of recovery modules,
where basic_wal_module will be used as a base template for the set of
callbacks introduced. The former name did not really reflect all that.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221227192449.GA3672473@nathanxps13
Previously, a CREATEROLE user without SUPERUSER could not alter
REPLICATION users in any way, and could not set the BYPASSRLS
attribute. However, they could manipulate the CREATEDB property
even if they themselves did not possess it.
With this change, a CREATEROLE user without SUPERUSER can set or
clear the REPLICATION, BYPASSRLS, or CREATEDB property on a new
role or a role that they have rights to manage if and only if
that property is set for their own role.
This implements the standard idea that you can't give permissions
you don't have (but you can give the ones you do have). We might
in the future want to provide more powerful ways to constrain
what a CREATEROLE user can do - for example, to limit whether
CONNECTION LIMIT can be set or the values to which it can be set -
but that is left as future work.
Patch by me, reviewed by Nathan Bossart, Tushar Ahuja, and Neha
Sharma.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobX=LHg_J5aT=0pi9gJy=JdtrUVGAu0zhr-i5v5nNbJDg@mail.gmail.com
This function is able to extract the full page images from a range of
records, specified as of input arguments start_lsn and end_lsn. Like
the other functions of this module, an error is returned if using LSNs
that do not reflect real system values. All the FPIs stored in a single
record are extracted.
The module's version is bumped to 1.1.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACVCcvzd7WiWvD=6_7NBvVB_r6G0EGSxL4F8vosAi6Se4g@mail.gmail.com
This adds combine, serial and deserial functions for the array_agg() and
string_agg() aggregate functions, thus allowing these aggregates to
partake in partial aggregations. This allows both parallel aggregation to
take place when these aggregates are present and also allows additional
partition-wise aggregation plan shapes to include plans that require
additional aggregation once the partially aggregated results from the
partitions have been combined.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra, Stephen Frost, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f9sx_6GTcvd6TMuZnNtCh0VhBzhX6FZqw17TgVFH-ga_A@mail.gmail.com
Enforce wal_retrieve_retry_interval on a per-subscription basis,
rather than globally, and arrange to skip that delay in case of
an intentional worker exit. This probably makes little difference
in the field, where apply workers wouldn't be restarted often;
but it has a significant impact on the runtime of our logical
replication regression tests (even though those tests use
artificially-small wal_retrieve_retry_interval settings already).
Nathan Bossart, with mostly-cosmetic editorialization by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221122004119.GA132961@nathanxps13
This provides a way to reserve connection slots for non-superusers.
The slots reserved via the new GUC are available only to users who
have the new predefined role pg_use_reserved_connections.
superuser_reserved_connections remains as a final reserve in case
reserved_connections has been exhausted.
Patch by Nathan Bossart. Reviewed by Tushar Ahuja and by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20230119194601.GA4105788@nathanxps13
Commit ea92368cd1 made max_wal_senders
a separate pool of backends from max_connections, but the documentation
and error message for superuser_reserved_connections weren't updated
at the time, and as a result are somewhat misleading. Update.
This is arguably a back-patchable bug fix, but because it seems quite
minor, no back-patch.
Patch by Nathan Bossart. Reviewed by Tushar Ahuja and by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20230119194601.GA4105788@nathanxps13
The original titles only had the module name, which is not very useful
when scanning the list. By adding a very brief description to each
title, the table of contents becomes friendlier.
Also amend the introduction in the "additional modules" appendix, using
the word "Extension" more extensively. Nowadays, almost all contrib
modules are extensions, so this is also helpful.
Author: Karl O. Pinc <kop@karlpinc.com>
Reviewed-by: Brar Piening <brar@gmx.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230102180015.372995a9@slate.karlpinc.com
While pg_hba.conf has support for non-literal username matches, and
this commit extends the capabilities that are supported for the
PostgreSQL user listed in an ident entry part of pg_ident.conf, with
support for:
1. The "all" keyword, where all the requested users are allowed.
2. Membership checks using the + prefix.
3. Using a regex to match against multiple roles.
1. is a feature that has been requested by Jelte Fennema, 2. something
that has been mentioned independently by Andrew Dunstan, and 3. is
something I came up with while discussing how to extend the first one,
whose implementation is facilitated by 8fea868.
This allows matching certain system users against many different
postgres users with a single line in pg_ident.conf. Without this, one
would need one line for each of the postgres users that a system user
can log in as, which can be cumbersome to maintain.
Tests are added to the TAP test of peer authentication to provide
coverage for all that.
Note that this introduces a set of backward-incompatible changes to be
able to detect the new patterns, for the following cases:
- A role named "all".
- A role prefixed with '+' characters, which is something that would not
have worked in HBA entries anyway.
- A role prefixed by a slash character, similarly to 8fea868.
Any of these can be still be handled by using quotes in the Postgres
role defined in an ident entry.
A huge advantage of this change is that the code applies the same checks
for the Postgres roles in HBA and ident entries, via the common routine
check_role().
**This compatibility change should be mentioned in the release notes.**
Author: Jelte Fennema
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DBBPR83MB0507FEC2E8965012990A80D0F7FC9@DBBPR83MB0507.EURPRD83.prod.outlook.com
Add leader_pid to pg_stat_subscription. leader_pid is the process ID of
the leader apply worker if this process is a parallel apply worker. If
this field is NULL, it indicates that the process is a leader apply
worker or a synchronization worker. The new column makes it easier to
distinguish parallel apply workers from other kinds of workers and helps
to identify the leader for the parallel workers corresponding to a
particular subscription.
Additionally, update the leader_pid column in pg_stat_activity as well to
display the PID of the leader apply worker for parallel apply workers.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Sawada Masahiko, Amit Kapila, Shveta Mallik
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
Avoid use of "_" in SGML IDs. Awhile back that was actually
disallowed by the toolchain, as a consequence of which our convention
has been to use "-" instead. Fix a couple of stragglers that are
particularly inconsistent with that convention and with related IDs.
This is just neatnik-ism, so no need for back-patch.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/769446.1673478332@sss.pgh.pa.us
Entries of pg-user in pg_ident.conf that are quoted and include '\1'
allow a replacement from a subexpression in a system user regexp. This
commit adds a test to track this behavior and a note in the
documentation, as it could be affected by the use of an AuthToken for
the pg-user in the IdentLines parsed.
This subject has come up in the discussion aimed at extending the
support of pg-user in ident entries for more patterns.
Author: Jelte Fennema
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQRNow4MwkBjgPxywXdJU_K3a9+Pm78JB7De3yQwwkTDew@mail.gmail.com
Add a cross-reference from the part of the page that introdues SECURITY
INVOKER and SECURITY DEFINER to the part of the page that talks about
writing SECURITY DEFINER functions safely, so that users are less likely
to miss it.
Remove discussion of the pre-8.3 behavior on the theory that it's
probably not very relevant any more, that release having gone out of
support nearly a decade ago.
Add a mention of the new createrole_self_grant GUC, which in
certain cases might need to be set to a safe value to avoid
unexpected consequences.
Possibly this section needs major surgery rather than just these
small tweaks, but hopefully this is at least a small step
forward.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmoauqd1cHQjsNEoxL5O-kEO4iC9dAPyCudSvmNqPJGmy9g@mail.gmail.com
Update the reference pages for various ALTER commands that
mentioned that you must be a member of role that will be the
new owner to instead say that you must be able to SET ROLE
to the new owner. Update ddl.sgml's generate statement on this
topic along similar lines.
Likewise, update CREATE SCHEMA and CREATE DATABASE, which
have options to specify who will own the new objects, to say
that you must be able to SET ROLE to the role that will own
them.
Finally, update the documentation for the GRANT statement
itself with some general principles about how the SET option
works and how it can be used.
Patch by me, reviewed (but not fully endorsed) by Noah Misch.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZk6VB3DQ83+DO5P_HP=M9PQAh1yj-KgeV30uKefVaWDg@mail.gmail.com
Commit 60684dd8 left loose ends when it came to maintaining toast
tables or partitions.
For toast tables, simply skip the privilege check if the toast table
is an indirect target of the maintenance command, because the main
table privileges have already been checked.
For partitions, allow the maintenance command if the user has the
MAINTAIN privilege on the partition or any parent.
Also make CLUSTER emit "skipping" messages when the user doesn't have
privileges, similar to VACUUM.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reported-by: Pavel Luzanov
Reviewed-by: Pavel Luzanov, Ted Yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230113231339.GA2422750@nathanxps13
The prior behavior was confusing and hard to document. For instance,
if you had UPDATE privileges, you could lock a table in any lock mode
except ACCESS SHARE mode.
Now, if granted a privilege to lock at a given mode, one also has
privileges to lock at a less-conflicting mode. MAINTAIN, UPDATE,
DELETE, and TRUNCATE privileges allow any lock mode. INSERT privileges
allow ROW EXCLUSIVE (or below). SELECT privileges allow ACCESS SHARE.
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9550c76535404a83156252b25a11babb4792ea1e.camel%40j-davis.com
As introduced in 2258e76, the docs were hard to parse:
- The examples used listed a lot of long records, bloating the output.
These are switched to show less records with the expanded format,
similarly to pageinspect.
- The function descriptions listed all the OUT parameters, producing
long lines. This is updated so as only the input parameters are
documented, clarifying the whole.
- Remove one example on pg_get_wal_stats() when per_record is set to
true, which is not really necessary once we know the output produced,
and the behavior of the parameter is documented.
While on it, fix a few grammar mistakes and simplify a couple of
sentences.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACVGcUpziGgQrcT-1G3dHWQQfWjYBu1YQ2ypv9y86dgogg@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 15
In both partitioning and traditional inheritance, require child
columns to be GENERATED if and only if their parent(s) are.
Formerly we allowed the case of an inherited column being
GENERATED when its parent isn't, but that results in inconsistent
behavior: the column can be directly updated through an UPDATE
on the parent table, leading to it containing a user-supplied
value that might not match the generation expression. This also
fixes an oversight that we enforced partition-key-columns-can't-
be-GENERATED against parent tables, but not against child tables
that were dynamically attached to them.
Also, remove the restriction that the child's generation expression
be equivalent to the parent's. In the wake of commit 3f7836ff6,
there doesn't seem to be any reason that we need that restriction,
since generation expressions are always computed per-table anyway.
By removing this, we can also allow a child to merge multiple
inheritance parents with inconsistent generation expressions, by
overriding them with its own expression, much as we've long allowed
for DEFAULT expressions.
Since we're rejecting a case that we used to accept, this doesn't
seem like a back-patchable change. Given the lack of field
complaints about the inconsistent behavior, it's likely that no
one is doing this anyway, but we won't change it in minor releases.
Amit Langote and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2793383.1672944799@sss.pgh.pa.us
Can be set to the empty string, or to either or both of "set" or
"inherit". If set to a non-empty value, a non-superuser who creates
a role (necessarily by relying up the CREATEROLE privilege) will
grant that role back to themselves with the specified options.
This isn't a security feature, because the grant that this feature
triggers can also be performed explicitly. Instead, it's a user experience
feature. A superuser would necessarily inherit the privileges of any
created role and be able to access all such roles via SET ROLE;
with this patch, you can configure createrole_self_grant = 'set, inherit'
to provide a similar experience for a user who has CREATEROLE but not
SUPERUSER.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobN59ct+Emmz6ig1Nua2Q-_o=r6DSD98KfU53kctq_kQw@mail.gmail.com
Previously, CREATEROLE users were permitted to make nearly arbitrary
changes to roles that they didn't create, with certain exceptions,
particularly superuser roles. Instead, allow CREATEROLE users to make such
changes to roles for which they possess ADMIN OPTION, and to
grant membership only in roles for which they possess ADMIN OPTION.
When a CREATEROLE user who is not a superuser creates a role, grant
ADMIN OPTION on the newly-created role to the creator, so that they
can administer roles they create or for which they have been given
privileges.
With these changes, CREATEROLE users still have very significant
powers that unprivileged users do not receive: they can alter, rename,
drop, comment on, change the password for, and change security labels
on roles. However, they can now do these things only for roles for
which they possess appropriate privileges, rather than all
non-superuser roles; moreover, they cannot grant a role such as
pg_execute_server_program unless they themselves possess it.
Patch by me, reviewed by Mark Dilger.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobN59ct+Emmz6ig1Nua2Q-_o=r6DSD98KfU53kctq_kQw@mail.gmail.com
Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in
multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon
logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply
worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the
commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To
improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to
be applied via parallel workers.
In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as
soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker
will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply
worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary
files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to
send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to
"partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all
remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to
read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking
way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel
apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the
transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at
commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading
from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker
available.
This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the
user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel
apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming
parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means
the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available.
The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled
to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour).
In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT
message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be
used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the
streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed
to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for
publications on servers < PG16.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko
Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
This allows an optional "S" modifier to be added to \dp and \z, to
have them include system objects in the list.
Note that this also changes the behaviour of a bare \dp or \z without
the "S" modifier to include temp objects in the list, and exclude
information_schema objects, making them consistent with other psql
meta-commands.
Nathan Bossart, reviewed by Maxim Orlov.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221206193606.GB3078082@nathanxps13
VACUUM normally ends by running vac_update_datfrozenxid(), which
requires a scan of pg_class. Therefore, if one attempts to vacuum a
database one table at a time --- as vacuumdb has done since v12 ---
we will spend O(N^2) time in vac_update_datfrozenxid(). That causes
serious performance problems in databases with tens of thousands of
tables, and indeed the effect is measurable with only a few hundred.
To add insult to injury, only one process can run
vac_update_datfrozenxid at the same time per DB, so this behavior
largely defeats vacuumdb's -j option.
Hence, invent options SKIP_DATABASE_STATS and ONLY_DATABASE_STATS
to allow applications to postpone vac_update_datfrozenxid() until the
end of a series of VACUUM requests, and teach vacuumdb to use them.
Per bug #17717 from Gunnar L. Sadly, this answer doesn't seem
like something we'd consider back-patching, so the performance
problem will remain in v12-v15.
Tom Lane and Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17717-6c50eb1c7d23a886@postgresql.org
In user-manag.sgml, document precisely what privileges are conveyed
by CREATEROLE. Make particular note of the fact that it allows
changing passwords and granting access to high-privilege roles.
Also remove the suggestion of using a user with CREATEROLE and
CREATEDB instead of a superuser, as there is no real security
advantage to this approach.
Elsewhere in the documentation, adjust text that suggests that
<literal>CREATEROLE</literal> only allows for role creation, and
refer to the documentation in user-manag.sgml as appropriate.
Patch by me, reviewed by Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZBsPL8nPhvYecx7iGo5qpDRqa9k_AcaW1SbOjugAY1Ag@mail.gmail.com
While on it, newlines are removed from the end of two elog() strings.
The others are simple grammar mistakes. One comment in pg_upgrade
referred incorrectly to sequences since a7e5457.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221230231257.GI1153@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 11
This is like the existing bt_page_stats() function, but it can
report on a range of pages rather than just one at a time.
I don't have a huge amount of faith in the portability of the
new test cases, but they do pass in a 32-bit FreeBSD VM here.
Further adjustment may be needed depending on buildfarm results.
Hamid Akhtar, reviewed by Naeem Akhter, Bertrand Drouvot,
Bharath Rupireddy, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANugjht-=oGMRmNJKMqnBC69y7vr+wHDmm0ZK6-1pJsxoBKBbA@mail.gmail.com
A refcursor variable that is bound to a specific query (by declaring
it with "CURSOR FOR") now chooses a portal name in the same way as an
unbound, plain refcursor variable. Its string value starts out as
NULL, and unless that's overridden by manual assignment, it will be
replaced by a unique-within-session portal name during OPEN.
The previous behavior was to initialize such variables to contain
their own name, resulting in that also being the portal name unless
the user overwrote it before OPEN. The trouble with this is that
it causes failures due to conflicting portal names if the same
cursor variable name is used in different functions. It is pretty
non-orthogonal to have bound and unbound refcursor variables behave
differently on this point, too, so let's change it.
This change can cause compatibility problems for applications that
open a bound cursor in a plpgsql function and then use it in the
calling code without explicitly passing back the refcursor value
(portal name). If the calling code simply assumes that the portal
name matches the called function's variable name, it will now fail.
That can be fixed by explicitly assigning a string value to the
refcursor variable before OPEN, e.g.
DECLARE myc CURSOR FOR SELECT ...;
BEGIN
myc := 'myc'; -- add this
OPEN myc;
We have no documentation examples showing the troublesome usage
pattern, so we can hope it's rare in practice.
Patch by me; thanks to Pavel Stehule and Jan Wieck for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1465101.1667345983@sss.pgh.pa.us
When collecting ANALYZE sample on foreign tables, postgres_fdw fetched
all rows and performed the sampling locally. For large tables this means
transferring and immediately discarding large amounts of data.
This commit allows the sampling to be performed on the remote server,
transferring only the much smaller sample. The sampling is performed
using the built-in TABLESAMPLE methods (system, bernoulli) or random()
function, depending on the remote server version.
Remote sampling can be enabled by analyze_sampling on the foreign server
and/or foreign table, with supported values 'off', 'auto', 'system',
'bernoulli' and 'random'. The default value is 'auto' which uses either
'bernoulli' (TABLESAMPLE method) or 'random' (for remote servers without
TABLESAMPLE support).
Teach VACUUM to decide on whether or not to trigger freezing at the
level of whole heap pages. Individual XIDs and MXIDs fields from tuple
headers now trigger freezing of whole pages, rather than independently
triggering freezing of each individual tuple header field.
Managing the cost of freezing over time now significantly influences
when and how VACUUM freezes. The overall amount of WAL written is the
single most important freezing related cost, in general. Freezing each
page's tuples together in batch allows VACUUM to take full advantage of
the freeze plan WAL deduplication optimization added by commit 9e540599.
Also teach VACUUM to trigger page-level freezing whenever it detects
that heap pruning generated an FPI. We'll have already written a large
amount of WAL just to do that much, so it's very likely a good idea to
get freezing out of the way for the page early. This only happens in
cases where it will directly lead to marking the page all-frozen in the
visibility map.
In most cases "freezing a page" removes all XIDs < OldestXmin, and all
MXIDs < OldestMxact. It doesn't quite work that way in certain rare
cases involving MultiXacts, though. It is convenient to define "freeze
the page" in a way that gives FreezeMultiXactId the leeway to put off
the work of processing an individual tuple's xmax whenever it happens to
be a MultiXactId that would require an expensive second pass to process
aggressively (allocating a new multi is especially worth avoiding here).
FreezeMultiXactId is eager when processing is cheap (as it usually is),
and lazy in the event of an individual multi that happens to require
expensive second pass processing. This avoids regressions related to
processing of multis that page-level freezing might otherwise cause.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkFok_6EAHuK39GaW4FjEFQsY=3J0AAd6FXk93u-Xq3Fg@mail.gmail.com
Given the soft-input-error feature, we can reduce these functions
to be just thin wrappers around a soft-error call of the
corresponding datatype input function. This means less code and
more certainty that the to_reg* functions match the normal input
behavior.
Notably, it also means that they will accept numeric OID input,
which they didn't before. It's not clear to me if that omission
had more than laziness behind it, but it doesn't seem like
something we need to work hard to preserve.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3910031.1672095600@sss.pgh.pa.us
This option extracts (potentially decompressing) full-page images
included in WAL records into a given target directory. These images are
subject to the same filtering rules as the normal display of the WAL
records, hence with --relation one can for example extract only the FPIs
issued on the relation defined. By default, the records are printed or
their stats computed (--stats), using --quiet would only save the images
without any output generated.
This is a tool aimed mostly for very experienced users, useful for
fixing page-level corruption or just analyzing the past state of a page,
and there were no easy way to do that with the in-core tools up to now
when looking at WAL.
Each block is saved in a separate file, to ease their manipulation, with
the file respecting <lsn>.<ts>.<db>.<rel>.<blk>_<fork> with as format.
For instance, 00000000-010000C0.1663.1.6117.123_main refers to:
- WAL record LSN in hexa format (00000000-010000C0).
- Tablespace OID (1663).
- Database OID (1).
- Relfilenode (6117).
- Block number (123).
- Fork name of the file this block came from (_main).
Author: David Christensen
Reviewed-by: Sho Kato, Justin Pryzby, Bharath Rupireddy, Matthias van de
Meent
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOxo6XKjQb2bMSBRpePf3ZpzfNTwjQUc4Tafh21=jzjX6bX8CA@mail.gmail.com
This enables streaming or serializing changes immediately in logical
decoding. This parameter is intended to be used to test logical decoding
and replication of large transactions for which otherwise we need to
generate the changes till logical_decoding_work_mem is reached.
This helps in reducing the timing of existing tests related to logical
replication of in-progress transactions and will help in writing tests for
for the upcoming feature for parallelly applying large in-progress
transactions.
Author: Shi yu
Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Shveta Mallik, Amit Kapila, Dilip Kumar, Kuroda Hayato, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSZPR01MB63104E7449DBE41932DB19F1FD1B9@OSZPR01MB6310.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
After some copy-edit I made in commit 3a06a79cd1, we have a <sect2>
that only contains a warning box. This doesn't look good. Rework by
moving the sect2 title to be the warning's title, and put the 'id' to it
as well, so that the external reference continues to work.
Backpatch to 15.
In branch master, I also take the opportunity to add titles to a couple
of other warning boxes elsewhere in the documentation.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221219164713.ccnlvtkyj6lmshqq@alvherre.pgsql
Commit 2f9661311b changed command tags from strings to numbers, but
forgot to adjust the code in the event trigger example, which
consequently failed to compile.
While fixing that, improve the indentation to adhere to pgindent style.
Backpatch to v13, where the change was introduced.
Author: Laurenz Albe
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/81e36ac17dc80489e74dc5b6914afa6ccdb1a99d.camel@cybertec.at
The former name was discussed as being confusing, so use "split", as per
a suggestion from Magnus Hagander.
While on it, one of the output arguments is renamed from "segno" to
"segment_number", as per a suggestion from Kyotaro Horiguchi.
The documentation is updated to reflect all these changes.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEytQVaOOhGdoh0D7hGwe3fuKcRF6NthsSW7ww04EmtFgQ@mail.gmail.com
1349d279 added query planner support to allow more efficient execution of
aggregate functions which have an ORDER BY or a DISTINCT clause. Prior to
that commit, the planner would only request that the lower planner produce
a plan with the order required for the GROUP BY clause and it would be
left up to nodeAgg.c to perform the final sort of records within each
group so that the aggregate transition functions were called in the
correct order. Now that the planner requests the lower planner produce a
plan with the GROUP BY and the ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggregates in mind,
there is the possibility that the planner chooses a plan which could be
less efficient than what would have been produced before 1349d279.
While developing 1349d279, I had in mind that Incremental Sort would help
us in cases where an index exists only on the GROUP BY column(s).
Incremental Sort would just replace the implicit tuplesorts which are
being performed in nodeAgg.c. However, because the planner has the
flexibility to instead choose a plan which just performs a full sort on
both the GROUP BY and ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggregate columns, there is
potential for the planner to make a bad choice. The costing for
Incremental Sort is not perfect as it assumes an even distribution of rows
to sort within each sort group.
Here we add an escape hatch in the form of the enable_presorted_aggregate
GUC. This will allow users to get the pre-PG16 behavior in cases where
they have no other means to convince the query planner to produce a plan
which only sorts on the GROUP BY column(s).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvr1Sm+g9hbv4REOVuvQKeDWXcKUAhmbK5K+dfun0s9CvA@mail.gmail.com
This function takes in input a WAL segment name and returns a tuple made
of the segment sequence number (dependent on the WAL segment size of the
cluster) and its timeline, as of a thin SQL wrapper around the existing
XLogFromFileName().
This function has multiple usages, like being able to compile a LSN from
a file name and an offset, or finding the timeline of a segment without
having to do to some maths based on the first eight characters of the
segment.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Maxim Orlov, Michael
Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACWV=FCddsxcGbVOA=cvPyMr75YCFbSQT6g4KDj=gcJK4g@mail.gmail.com
A new function pg_stat_get_backend_subxact() can be used to get
information about the number of subtransactions in the cache of
a particular backend and whether that cache has overflowed. This
can be useful for tracking down performance problems that can
result from overflowed snapshots.
Dilip Kumar, reviewed by Zhihong Yu, Nikolay Samokhvalov,
Justin Pryzby, Nathan Bossart, Ashutosh Sharma, Julien
Rouhaud. Additional design comments from Andres Freund,
Tom Lane, Bruce Momjian, and David G. Johnston.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-ut0uwkRJDQJeDPXpVyTWD46m3gt3JDToE02hTfONEN=Q@mail.gmail.com
This option selects the default transfer mode. Having an explicit
option is handy to make scripts and tests more explicit. It also
makes it easier to talk about a "copy" mode rather than "the default
mode" or something like that, since until now the default mode didn't
have an externally visible name.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/50a97009-8ff9-ca4d-a0f6-6086a6775a5b%40enterprisedb.com
Add support for hexadecimal, octal, and binary integer literals:
0x42F
0o273
0b100101
per SQL:202x draft.
This adds support in the lexer as well as in the integer type input
functions.
Reviewed-by: John Naylor <john.naylor@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/b239564c-cad0-b23e-c57e-166d883cb97d@enterprisedb.com
Commits f92944137 et al. made IsInTransactionBlock() set the
XACT_FLAGS_NEEDIMMEDIATECOMMIT flag before returning "false",
on the grounds that that kept its API promises equivalent to those of
PreventInTransactionBlock(). This turns out to be a bad idea though,
because it allows an ANALYZE in a pipelined series of commands to
cause an immediate commit, which is unexpected.
Furthermore, if we return "false" then we have another issue,
which is that ANALYZE will decide it's allowed to do internal
commit-and-start-transaction sequences, thus possibly unexpectedly
committing the effects of previous commands in the pipeline.
To fix the latter situation, invent another transaction state flag
XACT_FLAGS_PIPELINING, which explicitly records the fact that we
have executed some extended-protocol command and not yet seen a
commit for it. Then, require that flag to not be set before allowing
InTransactionBlock() to return "false".
Having done that, we can remove its setting of NEEDIMMEDIATECOMMIT
without fear of causing problems. This means that the API guarantees
of IsInTransactionBlock now diverge from PreventInTransactionBlock,
which is mildly annoying, but it seems OK given the very limited usage
of IsInTransactionBlock. (In any case, a caller preferring the old
behavior could always set NEEDIMMEDIATECOMMIT for itself.)
For consistency also require XACT_FLAGS_PIPELINING to not be set
in PreventInTransactionBlock. This too is meant to prevent commands
such as CREATE DATABASE from silently committing previous commands
in a pipeline.
Per report from Peter Eisentraut. As before, back-patch to all
supported branches (which sadly no longer includes v10).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/65a899dd-aebc-f667-1d0a-abb89ff3abf8@enterprisedb.com
Add some cross-links between chapter "20. Server Parameters" and
"31. Logical Replication" regarding the available configuration
parameters, for easier navigation; and some more explanatory text too.
I (Álvaro) chose to duplicate max_replication_slots in Chapter 20,
because it has completely different meanings at each side of the
replication link.
Author: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: samay sharma <smilingsamay@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PsESqpy7w3Y6cX98c255ZuCjvipkhKjy6hZBjOv4E6iJA@mail.gmail.com
This is straightforward as far as it goes. However, it does not
attempt to trap errors occurring during the execution of domain
CHECK constraints. Since those are general user-defined
expressions, the only way to do that would involve starting up a
subtransaction for each check. Of course the entire point of
the soft-errors feature is to not need subtransactions, so that
would be self-defeating. For now, we'll rely on the assumption
that domain checks are written to avoid throwing errors.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1181028.1670635727@sss.pgh.pa.us
pg_input_is_valid() returns boolean, while pg_input_error_message()
returns the primary error message if the input is bad, or NULL
if the input is OK. The main reason for having two functions is
so that we can test both the details-wanted and the no-details-wanted
code paths.
Although these are primarily designed with testing in mind,
it could well be that they'll be useful to end users as well.
This patch is mostly by me, but it owes very substantial debt to
earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, Andrew Dunstan, and Amul Sul.
Thanks to Andres Freund for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
Postgres' standard mechanism for reporting errors (ereport() or elog())
is used for all sorts of error conditions. This means that throwing
an exception via ereport(ERROR) requires an expensive transaction or
subtransaction abort and cleanup, since the exception catcher dare not
make many assumptions about what has gone wrong. There are situations
where we would rather have a lighter-weight mechanism for dealing
with errors that are known to be safe to recover from without a full
transaction cleanup. This commit creates infrastructure to let us
adapt existing error-reporting code for that purpose. See the
included documentation changes for details. Follow-on commits will
provide test code and usage examples.
The near-term plan is to convert most if not all datatype input
functions to report invalid input "softly". This will enable
implementing some SQL/JSON features cleanly and without the cost
of subtransactions, and it will also allow creating COPY options
to deal with bad input without cancelling the whole COPY.
This patch is mostly by me, but it owes very substantial debt to
earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, Andrew Dunstan, and Amul Sul.
Thanks also to Andres Freund for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
The USER SET flag specifies that the variable should be set on behalf of an
ordinary role. That lets ordinary roles set placeholder variables, which
permission requirements are not known yet. Such a value wouldn't be used if
the variable finally appear to require superuser privileges.
The new flags are stored in the pg_db_role_setting.setuser array. Catversion
is bumped.
This commit is inspired by the previous work by Steve Chavez.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdsLd6E--epnGqXENqLP6dLwuNZrPMcNYb3wJ87WR7UBOQ%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov, Steve Chavez
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov, Steve Chavez
Commit 7103ebb7aa added support for MERGE, which included support for
inheritance hierarchies, but didn't document the fact that ONLY could
be specified before the source and/or target tables to exclude tables
inheriting from the tables specified.
Update merge.sgml to mention this, and while at it, add some
regression tests to cover it.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Nathan Bossart.
Backpatch to 15, where MERGE was added.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCU0XM-bJCvpJuVRU3UYNRqEBS6g4-zH%3Dj9Ye0caX8F6uQ%40mail.gmail.com
The tests don't have much coverage of segment related code, as we don't create
large enough tables. To make it easier to test these paths, add a new option
specifying the segment size in blocks.
Set the new option to 6 blocks in one of the CI tasks. Smaller numbers
currently fail one of the tests, for understandable reasons.
While at it, fix some segment size related issues in the meson build.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221107171355.c23fzwanfzq2pmgt@awork3.anarazel.de
To run all tests that support running against existing server:
$ meson test --setup running
To run just the main pg_regress tests against existing server:
$ meson test --setup running regress-running/regress
To ensure the 'running' setup continues to work, test it as part of the
freebsd CI task.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=XDQcmLoo7RR_i6FKQdDmcyb9q5gStnfuuQXrOGhB2sQ@mail.gmail.com
Provide <sect2> subdivisions in 9.26 System Information Functions and
Operators. This is useful because it adds a mini-TOC at the top of
the page to aid jumping to portions of what's become quite a long
section. Also, now that several of the subsections contain multiple
tables, it's hard to see the overall structure without headings.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4026789.1670426602@sss.pgh.pa.us
For historical reasons, pg_dump refers to large objects as "BLOBs".
This term is not used anywhere else in PostgreSQL, and it also means
something different in the SQL standard and other SQL systems.
This patch renames internal functions, code comments, documentation,
etc. to use the "large object" or "LO" terminology instead. There is
no functionality change, so the archive format still uses the name
"BLOB" for the archive entry. Additional long command-line options
are added with the new naming.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/868a381f-4650-9460-1726-1ffd39a270b4%40enterprisedb.com
Up to now we have allowed manual creation of an ON SELECT rule on
a table to convert it into a view. That was never anything but a
horrid, error-prone hack though. pg_dump used to rely on that
behavior to deal with cases involving circular dependencies,
where a dependency loop could be broken by separating the creation
of a view from installation of its ON SELECT rule. However, we
changed pg_dump to use CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW for that in commit
d8c05aff5 (which was later back-patched as far as 9.4), so there's
not a good argument anymore for continuing to support the behavior.
The proximate reason for axing it now is that we found that the
new statistics code has failure modes associated with the relkind
change caused by this behavior. We'll patch around that in v15,
but going forward it seems like a better idea to get rid of the
need to support relkind changes.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm2yXz+zOtv7y5zBd5WKT8O0Ld3YxikuU3dcyCvxF7gypA@mail.gmail.com
This rewrites the few places where first-person form was used, and
replaces with wording more in line with the rest of the documentation.
While there, the section on editing PO files is split between what
to edit with, and how to edit, as well as add a missing colon.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reported-by: wolakk@gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/166692508416.630.9910522387468316027@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Datatypes in CREATE TABLE statements in the examples were vertically
aligned in most cases, a few examples were unaligned with a single
space. This makes sure all examples on the same page are consistently
aligned.
Patch by Laurenz Albe with some additional fixups by me.
Author: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reported-by: lemes.marcelo26@gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/166870885664.635.16667004450401573487@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Compression specifications are currently used by pg_basebackup and
pg_receivewal, and are able to let the user control in an extended way
the method and level of compression used. As an effect of this commit,
pg_dump's -Z/--compress is now able to use more than just an integer, as
of the grammar "method[:detail]".
The method can be either "none" or "gzip", and can optionally take a
detail string. If the detail string is only an integer, it defines the
compression level. A comma-separated list of keywords can also be used
method allows for more options, the only keyword supported now is
"level".
The change is backward-compatible, hence specifying only an integer
leads to no compression for a level of 0 and gzip compression when the
level is greater than 0.
Most of the code changes are straight-forward, as pg_dump was relying on
an integer tracking the compression level to check for gzip or no
compression. These are changed to use a compression specification and
the algorithm stored in it.
As of this change, note that the dump format is not bumped because there
is no need yet to track the compression algorithm in the TOC entries.
Hence, we still rely on the compression level to make the difference
when reading them. This will be mandatory once a new compression method
is added, though.
In order to keep the code simpler when parsing the compression
specification, the code is changed so as pg_dump now fails hard when
using gzip on -Z/--compress without its support compiled, rather than
enforcing no compression without the user knowing about it except
through a warning. Like before this commit, archive and custom formats
are compressed by default when the code is compiled with gzip, and left
uncompressed without gzip.
Author: Georgios Kokolatos
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/O4mutIrCES8ZhlXJiMvzsivT7ztAMja2lkdL1LJx6O5f22I2W8PBIeLKz7mDLwxHoibcnRAYJXm1pH4tyUNC4a8eDzLn22a6Pb1S74Niexg=@pm.me
This has always worked, but you'd be unlikely to guess it
from the documentation. Add an example showing it.
Lack of docs noted by David Johnston. Back-patch to v13;
the documentation layout we used before that was not very
amenable to squeezing in multiple examples.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwZ4Vy1Xty0G5Ok+ot=NDrU3C6hzF1JwUk-FEkwe3V9_RA@mail.gmail.com
Rearrange the discussion of user-private schemas so that details
applying only to upgraded-from-pre-v15 databases are in a follow-on
paragraph, not in the main description of how to set up this pattern.
This seems a little clearer even today, and it'll get more so as
pre-v15 systems fade into the sunset.
Wording contributions from Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Noah Misch.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYUHsfp90inEMAP0yNr7Y_L6EphPH1YOon1JKtBztXHyQ@mail.gmail.com
This also adds references to this new chapter at relevant sections of
our documentation. Previously much of these internal details were
exposed to users, but not explained. This also updates RELEASE
SAVEPOINT.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANbhV-E_iy9fmrErxrCh8TZTyenpfo72Hf_XD2HLDppva4dUNA@mail.gmail.com
Author: Simon Riggs, Laurenz Albe
Reviewed-by: Bruce Momjian
Backpatch-through: 11
This commit moves the code in charge of deparsing the method and detail
strings fed later to parse_compress_specification() to a common routine,
where the backward-compatible case of only an integer being found (N
= 0 => "none", N > 1 => gzip at level N) is handled.
Note that this has a side-effect for pg_basebackup, as we now attempt to
detect "server-" and "client-" before checking for the integer-only
pre-14 grammar, where values like server-N and client-N (without the
follow-up detail string) are now valid rather than failing because of an
unsupported method name. Past grammars are still handled the same way,
but these flavors are now authorized, and would now switch to consider N
= 0 as no compression and N > 1 as gzip with the compression level used
as N, with the caller still controlling if the compression method should
be done server-side, client-side or is unspecified. The documentation
of pg_basebackup is updated to reflect that.
This benefits other code paths that would like to rely on the same logic
as pg_basebackup and pg_receivewal with option values used for
compression specifications, one area discussed lately being pg_dump.
Author: Georgios Kokolatos, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/O4mutIrCES8ZhlXJiMvzsivT7ztAMja2lkdL1LJx6O5f22I2W8PBIeLKz7mDLwxHoibcnRAYJXm1pH4tyUNC4a8eDzLn22a6Pb1S74Niexg=@pm.me
Previously, an idle startup (recovery) process would wake up every 5
seconds to have a chance to poll for promote_trigger_file, even if that
GUC was not configured. That promotion triggering mechanism was
effectively superseded by pg_ctl promote and pg_promote() a long time
ago. There probably aren't many users left and it's very easy to change
to the modern mechanisms, so we agreed to remove the feature.
This is part of a campaign to reduce wakeups on idle systems.
Author: Simon Riggs <simon.riggs@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Ian Lawrence Barwick <barwick@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANbhV-FsjnzVOQGBpQ589%3DnWuL1Ex0Ykn74Nh1hEjp2usZSR5g%40mail.gmail.com
This provides two new predefined roles: pg_vacuum_all_tables and
pg_analyze_all_tables. Roles which have been granted these roles can
perform vacuum or analyse respectively on any or all tables as if they
were a superuser. This removes the need to grant superuser privilege to
roles just so they can perform vacuum and/or analyze.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Bharath Rupireddy, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Stephen Frost, Robert
Haas, Mark Dilger, Tom Lane, Corey Huinker, David G. Johnston, Michael
Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220722203735.GB3996698@nathanxps13
Currently a table can only be vacuumed or analyzed by its owner or
a superuser. This can now be extended to any user by means of an
appropriate GRANT.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Bharath Rupireddy, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Stephen Frost, Robert
Haas, Mark Dilger, Tom Lane, Corey Huinker, David G. Johnston, Michael
Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220722203735.GB3996698@nathanxps13
pg_hba.conf and pg_ident.conf gain support for three record keywords:
- "include", to include a file.
- "include_if_exists", to include a file, ignoring it if missing.
- "include_dir", to include a directory of files. These are classified
by name (C locale, mostly) and need to be prefixed by ".conf", hence
following the same rules as GUCs.
This commit relies on the refactoring pieces done in efc9816, ad6c528,
783e8c6 and 1b73d0b, adding a small wrapper to build a list of
TokenizedAuthLines (tokenize_include_file), and the code is shaped to
offer some symmetry with what is done for GUCs with the same options.
pg_hba_file_rules and pg_ident_file_mappings gain a new field called
file_name, to track from which file a record is located, taking
advantage of the addition of rule_number in c591300 to offer an
organized view of the HBA or ident records loaded.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
The lwlock wait queue scalability issue fixed in a4adc31f69 was quite hard to
find because of the exponential backoff and because we adjust spins_per_delay
over time within a backend.
To make it easier to find similar issues in the future, add a wait event for
the pg_usleep() in perform_spin_delay(). Showing a wait event while spinning
without sleeping would increase the overhead of spinlocks, which we do not
want.
We may at some later point want to have more granular wait events, but that'd
be a substantial amount of work. This provides at least some insights into
something currently hard to observe.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
https://postgr.es/m/20221120204310.xywrhyxyytsajuuq@awork3.anarazel.de
The Hunspell project moved from Sourceforge to Github sometime
in 2016, so update our links to match the new URL. Backpatch
the doc changes to all supported versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DC9A662A-360D-4125-A453-5A6CB9C6C4B4@yesql.se
Backpatch-through: v11
The postmaster normally sends SIGQUIT to force-terminate its
child processes after a child crash or immediate-stop request.
If that doesn't result in child exit within a few seconds,
we follow it up with SIGKILL. This patch provides GUC flags
that allow either of these signals to be replaced with SIGABRT.
On typically-configured Unix systems, that will result in a
core dump being produced for each such child. This can be
useful for debugging problems, although it's not something you'd
want to have on in production due to the risk of disk space
bloat from lots of core files.
The old postmaster -T switch, which sent SIGSTOP in place of
SIGQUIT, is changed to be the same as send_abort_for_crash.
As far as I can tell from the code comments, the intent of
that switch was just to block things for long enough to force
core dumps manually, which seems like an unnecessary extra step.
(Maybe at the time, there was no way to get most kernels to
produce core files with per-PID names, requiring manual core
file renaming after each one. But now it's surely the hard way.)
I also took the opportunity to remove the old postmaster -n
(skip shmem reinit) switch, which hasn't actually done anything
in decades, though the documentation still claimed it did.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2251016.1668797294@sss.pgh.pa.us
Similar to how the INHERIT option controls whether or not the
permissions of the granted role are automatically available to the
grantee, the new SET permission controls whether or not the grantee
may use the SET ROLE command to assume the privileges of the granted
role.
In addition, the new SET permission controls whether or not it
is possible to transfer ownership of objects to the target role
or to create new objects owned by the target role using commands
such as CREATE DATABASE .. OWNER. We could alternatively have made
this controlled by the INHERIT option, or allow it when either
option is given. An advantage of this approach is that if you
are granted a predefined role with INHERIT TRUE, SET FALSE, you
can't go and create objects owned by that role.
The underlying theory here is that the ability to create objects
as a target role is not a privilege per se, and thus does not
depend on whether you inherit the target role's privileges. However,
it's surely something you could do anyway if you could SET ROLE
to the target role, and thus making it contingent on whether you
have that ability is reasonable.
Design review by Nathan Bossat, Wolfgang Walther, Jeff Davis,
Peter Eisentraut, and Stephen Frost.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmob+zDSRS6JXYrgq0NWdzCXuTNzT5eK54Dn2hhgt17nm8A@mail.gmail.com
The TAP tests can, to some degree, be controlled by a set of environment
variables. These were however only documented in a README and not in the
main documentation. This adds documentation of these variables, as well
as changes one CPAN reference to a ulink for consistency. While there,
also tag CPAN as an acronym as it's listed in the acronyms section.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YyPd9unV14SX2bLF@paquier.xyz
To improve readability of the TG_ variables definition lists, this moves
the datatypes up to the defined term to avoid having each entry start
with "Data type". This also removes redundant wording that that didn't
carry any information from the descriptions.
Author: Christoph Berg <myon@debian.org>
Reviewed-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Yw4Noe3A2s87A0qq@msg.df7cb.de
This adds a new psql command \bind that sets query parameters and
causes the next query to be sent using the extended query protocol.
Example:
SELECT $1, $2 \bind 'foo' 'bar' \g
This may be useful for psql scripting, but one of the main purposes is
also to be able to test various aspects of the extended query protocol
from psql and to write tests more easily.
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/e8dd1cd5-0e04-3598-0518-a605159fe314@enterprisedb.com
Setting archive_library and archive_command at the same time is now an
error. Before, archive_library would take precedence over
archive_command.
Author: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20220914222736.GA3042279%40nathanxps13
Commit fede15417 introduced FILTER by jamming it into the existing
example introducing HAVING, which seems pedagogically poor to me;
and it added no information about what the keyword actually does.
Not to mention that the claimed output didn't match the sample
data being used in this running example.
Revert that and instead make an independent example using FILTER.
To help drive home the point that it's a per-aggregate filter,
we need to use two aggregates not just one; for consistency
expand all the examples in this segment to do that.
Also adjust the example using WHERE ... LIKE so that it'd produce
nonempty output with this sample data, and show that output.
Back-patch, as the previous patch was. (Sadly, v10 is now out
of scope.)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/166794307526.652.9073408178177444190@wrigleys.postgresql.org
There are some cases (e.g. when the subscription is created using the
connect = false option) where the remote replication slot was not created
automatically and the user must create it manually before the subscription
can be activated. There was not enough information in the docs for users
to do this easily.
Author: Peter Smith
Reviewd by: Shi yu, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PvqdqOanheWSHDyhQiF+Z-7w=-+k4U+bwbT=b6YQ_hrXQ@mail.gmail.com
pg_ident_file_mappings.line_number was described as a line number in
pg_ident.conf for a "rule" number, but this should refer to a "map".
The same inconsistent term was used in the main paragraph describing the
view.
Extracted from a patch by the same author. Issue introduced by
a2c8499 where this view has been added.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221026031948.cbrnzgy5e7glsq2d@jrouhaud
Backpatch-through: 15
This gives some additional advice on using row filters and column
lists on publications securely.
Author: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Euler Taveira <euler@eulerto.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20330.1652105397@antos
These numbers are strictly-monotone identifiers assigned to each rule
of pg_hba_file_rules and each map of pg_ident_file_mappings when loading
the HBA and ident configuration files, indicating the order in which
they are checked at authentication time, until a match is found.
With only one file loaded currently, this is equivalent to the line
numbers assigned to the entries loaded if one wants to know their order,
but this becomes mandatory once the inclusion of external files is
added to the HBA and ident files to be able to know in which order the
rules and/or maps are applied at authentication. Note that NULL is used
when a HBA or ident entry cannot be parsed or validated, aka when an
error exists, contrary to the line number.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
As of this commit, any database or user entry beginning with a slash (/)
is considered as a regular expression. This is particularly useful for
users, as now there is no clean way to match pattern on multiple HBA
lines. For example, a user name mapping with a regular expression needs
first to match with a HBA line, and we would skip the follow-up HBA
entries if the ident regexp does *not* match with what has matched in
the HBA line.
pg_hba.conf is able to handle multiple databases and roles with a
comma-separated list of these, hence individual regular expressions that
include commas need to be double-quoted.
At authentication time, user and database names are now checked in the
following order:
- Arbitrary keywords (like "all", the ones beginning by '+' for
membership check), that we know will never have a regexp. A fancy case
is for physical WAL senders, we *have* to only match "replication" for
the database.
- Regular expression matching.
- Exact match.
The previous logic did the same, but without the regexp step.
We have discussed as well the possibility to support regexp pattern
matching for host names, but these happen to lead to tricky issues based
on what I understand, particularly with host entries that have CIDRs.
This commit relies heavily on the refactoring done in a903971 and
fc579e1, so as the amount of code required to compile and execute
regular expressions is now minimal. When parsing pg_hba.conf, all the
computed regexps needs to explicitely free()'d, same as pg_ident.conf.
Documentation and TAP tests are added to cover this feature, including
cases where the regexps use commas (for clarity in the docs, coverage
for the parsing logic in the tests).
Note that this introduces a breakage with older versions, where a
database or user name beginning with a slash are treated as something to
check for an equal match. Per discussion, we have discarded this as
being much of an issue in practice as it would require a cluster to
have database and/or role names that begin with a slash, as well as HBA
entries using these. Hence, the consistency gained with regexps in
pg_ident.conf is more appealing in the long term.
**This compatibility change should be mentioned in the release notes.**
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion, Tom Lane, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fff0d7c1-8ad4-76a1-9db3-0ab6ec338bf7@amazon.com
56788d215 adjusted the parallel seq scan code so that instead of handing
out a single block at a time to parallel workers, it now hands out ranges
of blocks.
Here we update the documentation which still claimed that workers received
just 1 block at a time.
Reported-by: Zhang Mingli
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17c99615-2c3b-4e4e-9d0b-424a66a7bccd@Spark
Backpatch-through: 14, where 56788d215 was added.
Various test suites use the "openssl" program as part of their setup.
There isn't a way to override which openssl program is to be used,
other than by fiddling with the path, perhaps. This has gotten
increasingly problematic because different versions of openssl have
different capabilities and do different things by default.
This patch checks for an openssl binary in configure and meson setup,
with appropriate ways to override it. This is similar to how "lz4"
and "zstd" are handled, for example. The meson build system actually
already did this, but the result was only used in some places. This
is now applied more uniformly.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/dc638b75-a16a-007d-9e1c-d16ed6cf0ad2%40enterprisedb.com
As currently designed, with a callback registered in a ERROR_CLEANUP
block, the shutdown callback would get called twice when updating
archive_library on SIGHUP, which is something that we want to avoid to
ease the life of extension writers.
Anyway, an ERROR in the archiver process is treated as a FATAL, stopping
it immediately, hence there is no need for a ERROR_CLEANUP block.
Instead of that, the shutdown callback is not called upon
before_shmem_exit(), giving to the modules the opportunity to do any
cleanup actions before the server shuts down its subsystems.
While on it, this commit adds some testing coverage for the shutdown
callback. Neither shell_archive nor basic_archive have been using it,
and one is added to shell_archive, whose trigger is checked in a TAP
test through a shutdown sequence.
Author: Nathan Bossart, Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221015221328.GB1821022@nathanxps13
Backpatch-through: 15
It can be useful to know when a relation has last been used, e.g., when
evaluating whether an index is still required. It was already possible to
infer the time of the last usage by tracking, e.g.,
pg_stat_all_indexes.idx_scan over time. But far from everybody does so.
To make it easier to detect the last time a relation has been scanned, track
that time in each relation's pgstat entry. To minimize overhead a) the
timestamp is updated only when the backend pending stats entry is flushed to
shared stats b) the last transaction's stop timestamp is used as the
timestamp.
Bumps catalog and stats format versions.
Author: Dave Page <dpage@pgadmin.org>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Bruce Momjian <bruce@momjian.us>
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+OCxozrVHNFVEPkweUHMZje+t1tfY816d9MZYc6eZwOOusOaQ@mail.gmail.com
Using pg_buffercache_summary() is significantly cheaper than querying
pg_buffercache and summarizing in SQL.
Author: Melih Mutlu <m.melihmutlu@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhang Mingli <zmlpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGPVpCQAXYo54Q%3D8gqBsS%3Du0uk9qhnnq4%2B710BtUhUisX1XGEg%40mail.gmail.com
Commit 3d956d956 allowed the COPY, but it's done by inserting individual
rows to the foreign table, so it can be inefficient due to the overhead
caused by each round-trip to the foreign server. To improve performance
of the COPY in such a case, this patch allows batch insertion, by
extending the multi-insert machinery in CopyFrom() to the foreign-table
case so that we insert multiple rows to the foreign table at once using
the FDW callback routine added by commit b663a4136. This patch also
allows this for postgres_fdw. It is enabled by the "batch_size" option
added by commit b663a4136, which is disabled by default.
When doing batch insertion, we update progress of the COPY command after
performing the FDW callback routine, to count rows not suppressed by the
FDW as well as a BEFORE ROW INSERT trigger. For consistency, this patch
changes the timing of updating it for plain tables: previously, we
updated it immediately after adding each row to the multi-insert buffer,
but we do so only after writing the rows stored in the buffer out to the
table using table_multi_insert(), which I think would be consistent even
with non-batching mode, because in that mode we update it after writing
each row out to the table using table_tuple_insert().
Andrey Lepikhov, heavily revised by me, with review from Ian Barwick,
Andrey Lepikhov, and Zhihong Yu.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bc489202-9855-7550-d64c-ad2d83c24867%40postgrespro.ru
Add
After=network-online.target
Wants=network-online.target
to the suggested unit file for starting a Postgres server.
This delays startup until the network interfaces have been
configured; without that, any attempt to bind to a specific
IP address will fail.
If listen_addresses is set to "localhost" or "*", it might be
possible to get away with the less restrictive "network.target",
but I don't think we need to get into such detail here.
Per suggestion from Pablo Federico.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/166552157407.591805.10036014441784710940@wrigleys.postgresql.org
